Nokia 6800 User Manual
Electronic userâÂÂs guide released sub ject to "Nokia UserâÂÂs Guides Terms and Co nditions, 7th June, 1998" UserâÂÂs Guide for Nokia 6800 9354470 Issue 1
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATION declare under our sole responsibility that the product NHL-6 is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/declaration_of_conformity/. Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribu tion or storage of part or all of the contents in this docum ent in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is proh ibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People and Pop-Port are trademarks or registered t rademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be t rademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. US Patent No 5818437 a nd other pending patent s. T9 text input softwa re Copyright (C) 1997-2003. T egic Communications, Inc. All right s reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products descr ibed in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible for any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequential or indirect damages howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided "as is". Except as required by applicable law, no warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. Nokia reserves the right to revise this document or withdraw it at any time without prior noti ce. The availability of particular products may vary by region. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest to you. Please dispose of batteries properly.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 3 Contents FOR YOUR SAFE TY ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......11 Access codes ........ .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....14 Overview of the phone functions ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ........16 Messaging conc ept .............................................................................................................. ..................... 16 Multimedia messaging service (MMS) ............................................................................................. ... 16 Polyphonic sound (MIDI) ........................................................................................................ ................. 16 General Packet Radio Service (G PRS) ............................................................................................ ...... 17 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................................................ 18 MIDP JavaTM applicati ons ... .................................................................................................... ............... 18 Stereo radio ...................................................................................... ............................. .............................. 18 Over the Air (OTA ) settings service ............................................................................................ ........... 18 Shared memory .................................................................................................................. ........................ 19 1. Your pho ne.............. ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......20 Keys (flip closed) ..................... ........................................................................................ ........................... 2 0 Connectors ..................................................................................................................... ........... ................... 2 1 Keys (flip open) ............................................................................................................... ............................ 2 2 Standby mode ................................................................................................................... .......................... 23 Screen saver ................................................................................................................... .......................... 24 Wallpaper ................................................................................................................................................. 24 Essential indicators in sta ndby mode ........................................................................................... .... 2 4 Headset ........................................................................................................................ ................................. 26 2. Getting s tarted ................... ......... ....... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......28 Installing the SIM card and the ba ttery........................................................................................ .. .... 2 8 Charging the battery ........................................................................................................... ..................... 31
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 4 Switching the ph one on and off ................................................................................................. .......... 31 Opening the flip ............................................................................................................... .......................... 33 Switching the keyb oard lights on or off ............................... ......................................................... .. 36 Keypad lock (Keyguard) ......................................................................................................... .................. 36 3. Call functio ns ................ ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .......... ......... .38 Making a call .................................................................................................................. ............................ 38 Speed dialling a phone number .............................................. .................................................... ....... 3 9 Making a confere nce call ......................................................... .............................................. ............. 4 0 Answering or rejecting a n incoming call ........................................................................................ .... 41 Call waiting ................................................................................... ................................ ........................... 41 Options during a call ............. ............................................................................................. ...................... 42 Loudspeaker ............................................................................................................................................. 4 2 4. Writing te xt ............ ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......44 Writing text using the messagin g keyboard ...................................................................................... 44 Typing accented characters ..................................................................................................... ........... 45 Writing text when the flip is closed ........................................................................................... ......... 46 Setting predictive text input on or off ........................................................................................ ..... 46 Using predictive text input .................................................................................................... .............. 46 Writing compoun d words ......................................................................................................... ........ 47 Using traditional text input ................................................................................................... ............. 47 Tips for writing text .......................................................................................................... ..................... 48 5. Contacts ........... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....50 Selecting settings for contacts ................................................................................................ .......... .... 5 0 Saving names and phone numbers (Add contact) ....................................................................... .... 51 Saving multip le numbers and text i tems per name ..................................................................... 51 Changing th e default number .................................................................................................... ..... 52 Searching for a nam e in contacts ............................................................................................... .......... 53
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 5 Editing a name, n umber or text item ............................................................................................ ...... 5 3 Erasing names and n umbers...................................................................................................... ............. 54 Copying contacts ............................................................................................................... ........................ 54 Sending and receiving a business card .................................... ...................................................... ..... 55 Speed dialling .......................... ....................................................................................... ............................ 5 6 Info numbers ............................ ....................................................................................... ............................ 56 Service numbers ...................... .......................................................................................... ......................... 56 My numbers ............................. ........................................................................................ ........................... 5 7 Caller groups ............................ ...................................................................................... ............................. 57 6. Using the menu ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ........58 Accessing a menu function ...................................................................................................... .......... .... 58 List of menu functio ns ......................................................................................................... .................... 60 7. Menu functio ns ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ............ .68 Messages (Menu 1 ) ................ .............................................................................................. ..................... 68 Text messages (SMS service) .................................................................................................... .......... 68 Writing and sendin g messages ................................................................................................... .... 6 9 Options for sending a message .................................................................................................. ..... 69 Reading and replyi ng to a message ................................... ........................................................... 70 Inbox and sent item s folders ................................................ ................................................... ........ 71 Templates ................................................................................................................................................. 71 Inserting a text tem plate into a message .................................................................................... 72 Inserting a picture i nto a text message ....................................................................................... 7 2 Archive folder and my fold ers ................................................. ................................................. .......... 72 Distribution lists ............................................................................................................. ........................ 73 Multimedia messages ............................................................................................................ ............... 73 Writing and sendin g a multimedia m essage .............................................................................. 74 Reading and replyi ng to a multimedia message ....................................................................... 76
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 6 Inbox, Outbox, Sa ved and Sent items folders ......................................................................... .... 77 Multimedia messages mem ory full ........................................................................................... .... 7 7 Deleting messages .............. ................................................................................................ ................... 78 E-mail messages ................................................................................................................ ..................... 79 Writing and sendin g an e-mail............................................ ...................................................... ..... 79 Downloading e-ma il messages from your e-ma il account................................................. .... 8 0 Replying to an e-m ail message .................................................................................................. .... 81 Inbox, Outbox, Deleted item s, Sent items, Drafts and A rchive folders ............................... 81 E-mail settings ................. ............................................................................................... .................... 82 Options available for an e-ma il application ............................................................................... 84 Chat......................................... ................................................................................................................... 84 Voice messages ................................................................................................................. ...................... 85 Info messages .................................................................................................................. ........................ 86 Message settings ............................................................................................................... ..................... 86 Settings for text messages ..................................................................................................... .......... 87 Overwrite settings ............................................................................................................. ............. .... 88 Settings for multimedia messages ............................................................................................... .8 8 To receive the multimedia connection settings as a text message ..................................... 89 Font size setting .................. ............................................................................................ ....................... 90 Service commands ............................................................................................................... .................. 90 Call register (Menu 2) ......................................................................................................... ..................... 90 Recent calls lists ............................................................................................................. ........................ 91 Call counters and call timers .................................................................................................. ........ .... 9 1 Profiles (Menu 3) .................... .......................................................................................... ......................... 93 Settings (Menu 4) .............................................................................................................. ........................ 94 Time and date setti ngs ...... ................................................................................................... ................ 94 Clock .................................... ................................................................................................................... 94 Date .................................................................................................................................................... .... 95
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 7 Auto update of date and time ............................................. ...................................................... ..... 95 Call settings .................................................................................................................. ........................... 9 5 Call divert .................................................................................................................... ...................... .... 95 Anykey answer .................................................................................................................. ................... 96 Automatic red ial ...................................................................... ......................................... .................. 96 Speed dialling ................................................................................................................. ..................... 96 Call waiting ............................................................................... .................................... ....................... 97 Summary after call .......... ................................................................................................... ................ 97 Send my caller iden tity ........................................................................................................ ............. 97 Line for outgoing calls ... ..................................................................................................... .............. 97 Phone settings ..................... ............................................................................................ ....................... 98 Language ............................................................................................................................................... 98 Memory status.................. ................................................................................................ ................... 98 Security keyguard .............................................................................................................. ................. 98 Cell info displa y................ .............................................................................................. ..................... 99 Welcome note................... ................................................................................................ ................... 9 9 Network selection.................................................................... .......................................... ................. 99 Confirm SIM se rvice actions................................................. ................................................... ..... 10 0 Help text activation ................................................................ ........................................... ............. 100 Start-up tone .................................................................................................................. ................. . 100 Display settings............................................................................ ................................... ..................... 100 Wallpaper ................................................................................... ........................................................ 10 0 Colour schemes ........................................................................ ......................................... ............... 101 Operator logo .................................................................................................................. .................. 101 Screen saver .................................................................................................................. ................... 102 Display brightness ............................................................................................................. .............. 102 Tone settings .................................................................................................................. ...................... 102 Accessory settings ............................................................................................................. .................. 103
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 8 Security settings .............................................................................................................. .................... 104 Restore factory settings ....................................................................................................... ............ . 105 Organiser (Menu 5) ............................................................................................................. .................. . 106 Alarm clock .................................................................................................................... ...................... . 106 Calendar ......................................................................................... ........................................................ 10 7 Making a calendar no te ......................................................................................................... ........ 108 When the phone sounds an alarm for a note .......................................................................... 109 To-do list ..................................................................................................................... ......................... . 109 Notes (Menu 6) ................................................................................................................. ...................... 110 Radio (Menu 7) ................................................................................................................. ....................... 111 Tuning a radio cha nnel ......................................................................................................... ............. 112 Using the radio ................................................................................................................ .................... 113 Gallery (Menu 8) ............................................................................. .................................. ...................... 11 4 Games (Menu 9) ................................................................................................................. ..................... 116 Launching a game ............... ................................................................................................ ................ 116 Other options available for a game or game set .................................................................... 117 Game downloads ......................................................................... ........................................ ................ 11 7 Memory status for gam es ........................................................................................................ ......... 11 8 Game settings .................................................................................................................. .................... 118 Applications (Men u 10) ......................................................................................................... ............... 11 8 Launching an a pplication . ...................................................................................................... .......... 11 9 Other options availa ble for an applicatio n or application set ............................................ 119 Downloading an application ..................................................................................................... ...... . 12 0 Memory status for appl ications ................................................................................................. ..... 121 Extras (Menu 11) ............................................................................................................... ..................... 121 Calculator .............................................................................................................................................. 121 Perfoming a curren cy conversion .............................................................................................. . 1 22 Wallet .................................................................................................................................................... . 123
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 9 Saving and changing personal card information ........... ........................................................ 12 3 Personal notes ................................................................................................................. ................. 124 Wallet settings ................................................................................................................ ................. 124 Guidelines for paying for your purch ases with wallet ......................................................... . 125 Synchronisation ................... ............................................................................................. ................... 125 Synchronising from your phone .................................................................................................. 126 Saving the synch ronisation settings received as a tex t message ...................................... 127 Keying in the synch ronisation settings manually ................................................................. . 127 Synchronising from your PC ................................................. .................................................... .... 128 Countdown tim er ................................................................................................................ ................ 128 Stopwatch ..................................................................................... ................................. ....................... 129 Timing and split timi ng .. ...................................................................................................... .......... 129 Lap timing ..................................................................................................................... ..................... 130 Viewing and de leting times ..................................................................................................... .... . 13 0 Connectivity (M enu 12) ................................................................ ......................................... ............... 13 0 Infrared ................................................................................................................................ .................. 130 GPRS ....................................... ................................................................................................................ 132 WAP services (Menu 1 3)............................................................... .......................................... .............. 133 Basic steps for acc essing and using WAP services .................................................................... 134 Setting up the phone for a WA P service ..................................................................................... . 134 Saving the servic e settings received as a text message ....................................................... 134 Keying in the servic e settings manually ................................................................................... 135 Settings when GSM data i s the selected data bearer .............................................................. 136 Settings when GPRS is the sele cted data bearer ....................................................................... 137 Connecting to a WAP service .................................................................................................... ...... 138 Browsing the pages of a WAP service.......................................................................................... . 1 39 Using the phone keys while browsing ...................................................................................... . 139 Options while browsing . ........................................................................................................ ........ 139
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 10 Direct calling ..................... ............................................................................................ .................... 14 1 Ending a WAP conn ection ........................................................................................................ ........ 141 Appearance settings of the WA P browser ........................... ........................................................ 141 Bookmarks ............................................................................................................................................ . 142 Receiving a bookm ark ............................................................ ............................................... ......... 14 2 Service inbox .................................................................................................................. ...................... 143 Setting the phone to receive service messages ...................................................................... 143 The cache memory ............................................................................................................... ............... 14 4 Browser security settings ...................................................................................................... ............ 144 Security module ....................................................................... ......................................... ............... 144 Certificates ........................................................................................................................................ 14 5 Digital signature .............................................................................................................. ................ 147 Cookies ................................... ................................................................................................................ 147 SIM services (Menu 14) ......................................................................................................... ............... 148 8. PC Connectiv ity ...... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ............ ......... ......... ......... . 149 PC Suite ....................................................................................................................... ......... ..................... 14 9 GPRS, HSCSD and CSD ............................................................................................................ .......... 150 Using data communications a pplications ............................... ........................................................ 15 1 9. Battery infor mation....... ......... .......... ......... ......... ............ ......... ......... ......... ... 152 Charging and Discha rging ....................................................................................................... ............. 152 CARE AND MAIN TENANCE............... ......... .......... ......... ........... .......... ......... ..... 154 IMPORTANT S AFETY INFORMA TION................ .......... ........... ......... .......... ....... 155 Index ....... .......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ..... 161
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 11 FOR Y OUR SAFETY Read these simple gu idelines. Breaking the ru les may be dangerou s or illegal. Further detailed inform ation is given in this manual. Do not switch th e phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inte rference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST DonâÂÂt use a han d-held phone w hile driving. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interferen ce, which could aff ect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any re gulations or rul es. Switch the phon e off near med ical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING DonâÂÂt use the phone at a refuelling point. DonâÂÂt use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING DonâÂÂt use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, a nd follow any regu lations or rules. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal posit ion. DonâÂÂt tou ch the antenna unnecessarily.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 12 QUALIF IED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair ph one equipment. ACCESSORIES AND BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and bat teries. Do not connect incompatible products. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecti ng to any other device, read its userâÂÂs guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible produ cts. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make backup copies of all important data. WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water -resista nt. Keep it dr y. CALLING Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter the phone number, including the area co de, then press . To end a call, press . To answer a call, press . EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed (e.g. to e xit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear th e display. Enter the emergency number, the n press . Give your location. Do n ot end the call until told to do so.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 13 â Network Ser vices The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the EGSM 900 and GSM 1800 networks. Dualband is a network dependent feature. Check with your local service provider if you can subscribe to and use this feature. A number of features included in th is guide are called Netwo rk Services. These are special services th at you arra nge through your wireless service provi der. Before y ou can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you m ust subscribe to them through yo ur service provider and obtai n instructions for their use from you r service provider. Note: Some networ ks may not support a ll language-depen dent characters and/or services. â About accessories Check the model number of any charger b efore use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-7, A CP-8, ACP-12, LCH -9 and LCH-12. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers and accessories approved by th e phone manufacturer for use with t his particular phon e model. The use of a ny other ty pes may invalidat e any approval or warranty applyin g to the phone , and may be dangerous. For availability of a pproved accessories, please che ck with your deale r. When you disconnect t he power cord of any accessory, gr asp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 14 Access codes ⢠Security code (5 to 10 digits): The security code protects your phone against unauthorised use, and is supplied with the phone. The preset code is 12345. When you have changed the code, keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your phone. To change the code, and to set the phone to reque st it, see Security setti ngs on page 10 4 . If you key in an incorrect security code five times in succession, the phone may display Code error . Wait for five minutes and key in the code again. ⢠PIN code and PIN2 co de (4 to 8 digits): The PIN (Personal Identi fication Number) code protects your SIM card against unauthorise d use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. Set the phone to request the PIN code each time the phone is switched on, see Security settings on page 10 4 . The PIN2 code may be supplied with the SIM card and is require d to access some functions, such as charging unit counters. If you key in an incorrect PIN code t hree times in succession, the phone may display PIN code blocked and ask you to key in the PUK code. Contact your service provider to obtain the PUK code. ⢠PUK and PUK2 codes (8 digi ts): The PUK (Personal Unblocking Key) code is required to change a blocked PIN code. The PUK2 code is required to change a blocked PIN2 code.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 15 If the codes are not supplied wit h the SIM card, contact your local service provider. ⢠Barring password (4 digits): The barring password is required when using the Call barring service , see Security settings on page 10 4 . You can obtain the password from your service provider. ⢠Module PIN an d signing PIN : The module PIN is required to access the information in th e security module. See Security module on page 14 4 . The signing PIN is needed for the digital signature. See Digital signature on page 147 . The module PIN and the signing PIN are supplied with the SIM card if the SIM card has a security module in it. If you key in an incorrect PIN code se veral times, the phone may display PIN code blocked and ask you to key in t he PUK code. Contact your service provide r to get the PUK code. ⢠Wallet code (4-10 digi ts): The wallet code is require d to access the wallet services. If you key in a wrong wallet code several times, the wallet application is blocked for five minutes. For further information, see Wa ll e t on page 123 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 16 Overview of the phone functions Your Nokia 6800 phone is approved for use on EGSM 900 and GSM 1800 networks. It provides many functions which are practical for daily use, such as the messaging keyboard for easy and convenient writing, calendar, clock, alarm clock, countdown timer, calculator, games and many more. â Messaging concept Your phone combines the functions of a normal mobile phone and a messaging device. When the flip is closed you can use all functions of your phone like in any other mobile phone. By opening the flip of the phone you can use the additional messaging keyboard, which is specially designed for writing text easily and comfortably, see Writing and se nding messages on page 69 . â Multimedia messaging service (MMS) The phone is able to send multimedia messages that contain text and a picture and receive multimedia messages cont aining text, a polyphonic ringing tone and a picture. You can save the pictures and ringing tones for pe rsonalising your phone, see Multime dia messages on page 73 . â P olyphonic sound (MIDI) Polyphonic sound consists of several sound components that are played at the same time. Your phone can play four instruments at the same time from ove r 40
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 17 sound components presaved in your phone as ringing tones and message alert tones. The phone supports Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI) format. You can receive polyphonic ringing tones via the multimedia service, see Reading and replying to a mu ltimedia message on page 76 or you can download them via the gallery menu, see Gallery (Menu 8) on page 11 4 , or via PC Suite, see PC Suite on page 149 . â General P acket Radio Service (GPRS) GPRS technology allows mobile phones to be used for sending and re ceiving data over an Internet Protocol (IP) - based network. GPRS as such is a data bearer that enables wireless access to data networks such as the Internet. The applications that use GPRS are WAP services, MMS and text (SMS) messaging, downloading Java TM applications and the PC dial-up (for example, Interne t and e-mail). Note that your phone supports three simultaneous GPRS conne ctions. Before you can use GPRS technology ⢠Contact your network operator or se rvice provider for availability and subscription to the GPRS service. ⢠Save the GPRS settings for each of the applications used over GPRS. See Setting up the phone for a WAP service on page 134 , Message settings on page 86 and GPRS on page 132 . Pricing for GPRS and a pplications For more detailed information on pricing, contact your net work operator or service provider.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 18 â Loudspeaker This feature allows you to use your phone as a loudspeaker during a call, such as a conference call, and carry out other tasks simultaneously, while you talk. You can, for example, write messages, check your calendar notes or play games. See Loudspeaker on page 42 . â MIDP Java TM applications Your phone supports Java and includes some Java applications and games that have been especially designed for mobile phones. You can also download new applications and games to your phone, see Applic ations menu (Menu 10) on page 11 8 . â Stereo radio Your phone has an integrated stereo radio. You can listen to the radio using a headset or via the loudspeaker, see Radio (Menu 7) on page 111 . â Over the Air (OT A) settings service In order to use WAP, MMS, GPRS and othe r wireless services, you nee d to have proper settings on your phone. You may receive the settings directly as an OTA message and then save them on your phone. For more information on the availability of the settings, contact your network ope rator, service provider or the neares t authorised Nokia deale r.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 19 â Shared memory The following features in this phone may share memory: cont acts, text and multimedia messages, images and ringing tones in gallery, calendar, to-do not es, Java games, applications, notes application and e-mail. Using any such feature s may reduce the memory available for any features sharing memory. This is especially true with heavy use of any of the features (although some of the features may have a certain amount memory specially allotted to them in addition to the amount of memory shared with other features. For example, saving many images, Java applications etc. may take all of the shared me mory and your phone may display a message that the memory is full. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 20 1. Y our phone â Keys (flip closed) 1. Power key Switches the phone on and off. For example, when the keypad is locked, briefly pressing the power key turns the phone â s display lights on for approximately 15 seconds. 2. Volume k ey Adjusts the volume of the earpiece, the headset an d the loudspeaker. 3. Selection ke ys and The function of the keys depends on the guiding text shown on the display
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 21 above the keys, for example Menu and Contacts in standby mode. 4. 4-way joystick Enables scrolling through names, phone numbers, menus or settings. The 4- way joystick is also used to move the cursor up and down, and right and left when writing text, using the calendar, and in some game applications. 5. dials a phone number, and answers a call. In standby mode it shows the most recently called number. 6. ends an active call. Exits from any functio n. 7. - enter numbers and charact ers. and are used for various purposes in different functions. 8. Ear piece â Connectors 1. Charger connector 2. Pop-Port TM connector for headsets, data cable and other accessories. 3. Infrared (IR) port 4. Loudspeaker 5. Microphone
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 22 â Keys (flip open) When you open the flip, the display graphics are rotated 90 degrees and the left and right selection keys change positions, but the guiding texts above t he left and right selection keys do not change. For using the keys to writ e and edit text, see Writing text using the messaging keyboard on page 44 . 1. Keyboard lig ht key switches the keyboard light on or off to provide additional lighting while using the keyboard. See also Switching the keyboard lights on or off on page 36 . 2. Profile key opens a list of profiles when pressed briefly. Pressing and holding down the key switches the phone off. 3. Backspace deletes characters. 4. Enter key forces a line feed when editing te xt.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 23 5. Shift keys and enter upper case letters and symbols. You can either press the shift key first and then t he desired key or press both keys at the same time. 6. Space b ar keys and enter a space. 7. Power key/ Left sele ction key switches the power on, whe n the phone â s messaging keyboard is open and the phone is switched off. The function of the left selection key depends on the guiding text shown on the display above the key. 8. Character key (Chr) opens a set of characters and symbols during editing. â Standby mode When the phone is ready for use (the flip can be either closed or open), and you have not keyed in any characters, the phone is in standby mode. 1. Shows the name of the network in which the phone is currently being used, or the operator logo when no wallpaper is displayed. 2. Shows the signal strength of the cellular network at your current lo cation. The higher t he bar, the stronger the signal. 3.Shows the battery charge level. The higher the bar, the more power in the battery 4.The left selection key in st andby mode is Menu .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 24 5. The right selection key in standby mode is Contacts . See also Essential indicators in standby mode on page 24 . Screen saver With the flip closed, the phone automatically activates a digital clock screen saver to save power in standby mode. It will be activated after a certain length of time when none of the phone functions have been used, see Screen saver on page 102 . Press any key or open the flip to deactivate the screen saver. Note that if you have not set the time, 00:00 is displayed. To set the time, see Clock on page 94 . Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background pict ure as wallpaper when the phone is in standby mode, see Wallpaper on page 10 0 . Essential indicators in standby mode You have received one or several text or pictu re messages. See Reading and replying to a message on page 70 . You have received one or several multimedia messages. See Writing an d sending a mult imedia message on page 74 . You have received one or several voice messages. See V oice messages on page 85 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 25 The phone â s keypad is locked. See Keypad lock (K eyguard) on page 36 . and Security keyguard on page 98 . The phone does not ring for an incoming call or a text me ssage because Incoming call alert is set to Off and Message alert tone is set to Off . See Ton e se tt in g s on page 102 . The alarm clock is set to On . See Alarm clock on page 10 6 . The countdown ti mer is running. See Countdown timer on page 128 . The stopwatch is running in the background. See Stopwatch on page 129 . When GPRS connection is established, the indicator is shown on the top left of the display. See GPRS connection on page 132 and Browsing the pages of a WAP service on page 139 . The GPRS connection is suspended (on h old), for example, if th ere is an incoming or outgoing call during a GPRS dial-up connection. Infrared connection indicator. See Infrared on page 130 . All your calls are diverted to another number. If you have two phone lines, the divert indicator for the first line is and for the second line is . See Call divert on page 95 . or If you have two phone lines, the indicator displays the selected phone line. See Line for outgoing calls on page 97 . The loudspeaker has be en activated. See Loudspeaker on page 42 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 26 Calls are limited to a closed user group. See Security settin gs on page 10 4 . The timed profile is selected. See Profiles (Menu 3) on page 93 . , or A headset, handsfree or loopset accessory is connected to the phone. To enable the phone to show the time and date in standby mode. See Clock on page 94 and Date on page 95 . â Headset Connect the HDS-3 or HDB-4 headset to the Pop-Port connector of your phone as shown in the picture .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 27 You can carry the headset as shown in the pictur e.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 28 2. Getting started â Installing the SIM card and the battery ⢠Keep all mini ature SIM cards out o f the reach of sma ll children . ⢠The SIM card and its contacts can easily be damaged by scratches or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting or removing the card. ⢠Before installing the SIM card, always make sure that the phone is switched off and then remove the batte ry. 1. With the back of the phone facing you, press the back cover release button (1) and slide the back cover off the phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 29 2. To release the SIM card holder, slide the card holder backwards (2) and lift it up (3). 3. Insert the SIM card into the SIM card holder (4). Make sure t hat the SIM card is properly inserted and that the golden contact area on the card is facing downwa rds. 4. Close the SIM card holder (5) and slide it back to its place (6) .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 30 5. Replace the battery (7). 6. Direct the back cover towards the locking catches on the front cover 8) and slide the back cover until it locks into place (9).
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 31 â Charging the battery 1. Connect the lead from the charger to the socket on the bottom of your phon e. 2. Connect the charger to an A C wall socket. The text Charging is displayed briefly if the phone is switched on. If the battery is completely flat, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. You can use the phone while the charger is connected. The charging time depends on the charger and the battery used. For example, charging a BLC-2 battery with the ACP-12 charger takes about 1 hour and 30 minutes while the phone is in standby mode. â Switching the phone on and off To switch the phone on or off, when the flip is closed, press and hold the power key . To switch the phone off when the messaging keyboard is open, press and hold the profile key on the top right corner of the display. To switch the power on, when the phone â s messaging keyboard is open and the phone is switched off, press the power key (left selection key) .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 32 Note that if the phone displays Insert SIM card even t hough the SIM card is properly inserted, or SIM card not supported , contact your network operat or or service provider. Your phone does not support 5-Volt SIM cards and the card may need to be changed. ⢠If the phone asks for a PIN code, key in the PIN code (displayed as ****), and press OK . See also PIN code request in Security settings on page 10 4 and on page 10 4 . ⢠If the phone asks for a security code, key in the security code (displayed as *****), and press OK . See also Access codes on page 14 . Warning: Do not switch the phone on when wi reless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. TIPS ON EFFICIENT OPE RATION: Your phone has a built-in antenna . As with any other radio transmitt ing device, do no t touch the ante nna unnecessarily when the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call qua lity and may cause the phon e to operate at a high er power level than otherwise needed. Not touching the antenna area du ring a phone call opt imises the ant enna performan ce and the talktime of you r phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 33 â Opening the flip 1. Hold the phone with both hands and open the flip as shown in picture (1).
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 34 2. Turn the flip until you hear it click into place (2). Make sure that the golden contacts of the flip and the phone touch each other. 3. Turn the phone to a horizontal position and hold it as shown in picture (3) . The loudspeaker function automatically activates when the flip is o pen.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 35
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 36 Switching the keyb oard lights on or off ⢠The keyboard lights are not lit automatically, when you open the flip. To turn on the lights, press the light key on the top left corner of the keyboard. The keyboard lights are switched off after a certain time, but they are turned on again as soon as you press any key. ⢠To switch the keyboard lights off, press the keyboard light key or close the flip. â Keypad lock (K eyguard) You can lock the keypad to prevent the ke ys being accidentally pressed, for example, when your phone is in your handbag. You can lock the keypad only when the flip is closed. ⢠Locking the keypad In standby mode, press Menu and then within 1.5 seconds. ⢠Unlocking the keypad Press Unlock and then within 1.5 seconds or open the flip. Not e that the keyguard will not be activated, if you close the flip. To answer a call when the keyguard is on, press . During a call, the phone can be operated normally. When you end or reject the call, the keypad will be locked automatically.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 37 For locking the keypad during a call, see Options during a call on page 42 and for setting the secu rity keyguard, see Security keyguard on page 98 . Note: When Keyguar d is on, calls ma y be possible to the emergency number programm ed into your phone (e.g. 112 or other official eme rgency number). Key in the emergency n umber and press . The number is displayed on ly after you have keyed in its last digit.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 38 3. Call functions â Making a call 1. Key in the phone number, including the area code. If you key in an incorrect character, press Clear to delete it. With the flip open in standby mode, pressing any number key starts a call procedure. For international ca lls, press twice for the internation al prefix or if the flip is open, (the character re places the international access code) and then key in the country code, the area code without t he leading 0, if necessary, and finally the phone number. 2. Press to cal l the number. 3. Press to end the call or to cancel th e call attempt. See also Options during a call on page 42 . Making a call using con tacts ⢠See Searching for a name in contacts on page 53 . Press to call the number on the display. Last number redialling ⢠In standby mode, press once to access the list of the last 20 numbers you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number or name that you want, and press to cal l the number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 39 Calling your voice mailbox ⢠In standby mode when the flip is closed, press and hold , or press and When the flip is open, press and hold the corresponding number k ey on the keyboard. If the phone asks for the voice mailbox number, key it in and press OK . See also V oice messages on page 85 . Speed dialling a phone num ber Before you can use speed dialling, do as follows: 1. Press Menu , select Settings , Call settings and Speed dialling . Set t he setti ng to On . See also Speed dialling on page 96 . 2. Assign a phone number to one of the s peed dialling keys from to , see Speed dialling on page 56 . 3. Call the number in either of the foll owin g ways: ⢠Press the speed dialling key you want and then press . You can also activate speed dialling by pressing the corresponding number key, when the flip is open. ⢠If Speed dialling is set to on, press and hold a speed dialling key until the call is started.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 40 Making a conference call Conference call ing is a network service that allows up to si x people to take part in a conference call. 1. Make a call to the first participant. 2. To make a call to a new participant, press Options and sel ect New call . 3. Key in the phone number of the new participant, or retrieve it from the memory, and press Call . The first call is put on hold. 4. When the new call has been answered, join t he first participan t in the conference call. Press Options and sel ect Conference . 5. To add a new participant to the call, repeat steps 2 to 4. 6. To have a private conversation with one of the participants: Press Options and select Private and selec t the desired participant. Rejoin the conference call as described in step 4. 7. To end the confer ence call, press .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 41 â Answering or rejecting an incoming call Press to answer an incoming call and press to end the call. Press to reject an incoming call. If you press Silence , only the ringing tone is muted. Th en either answer or reject the call. If the HDB-4 or HDS-3 headset is connected to the phone, you can answer and end a call by pressing the headset key. Tip: If the Divert if busy function is activated to divert the calls, for example to your voice mailbox, rejecting an incoming call will also divert the call. See Call divert on page 95 . Note that when somebody is calling you, the phone shows the caller â s name, phone number, or the text Private number or Call. If more than one name is found in contacts wit h the same phone n umber as the call er â s number, only the caller â s number will be displayed, if this is ava ilable. Call waiting During a call, press to answer the wa iting call. The first call is put on hold. Press to end the active call. To activate the Call waitin g function, see Call waitin g on page 97 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 42 â Options during a call Many of the options that you can use during a call, are network services. Press Options during a call for some of the following options: Mute or Unmute , En d call , End all calls , Contacts , Menu and Hold or Unhold , New call , Con ference , Private , Answer , Reject and Lou dspeaker or Handset . Lock keypad to activate the keypad lock. Send DTMF to send DTMF tone strings, for example passwords or bank account numbers. Key in the DTMF string or search for it in contacts and press OK . Note that you can key in the wait character w and the pause character p by repeatedly pressing . Swap to switch between the active call and the call on hold, Trans fe r to connect a call on hold to an active call, and to disconnect yourself from the calls. Loudspeaker You can use your phon e as a loudspeaker duri ng a call. Do not hold the phone to your ear during loudspeaker operation. To activate the l oudspeaker: ⢠Open the flip. Or: ⢠When the flip is closed, press Options and select Loudspeaker or press Loudsp. , if available. To deactivate the loudspeaker during a call: ⢠Close the flip or press Handset , when t he flip is open. Or:
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 43 ⢠When the flip is closed, press Options and select Handset or press Handset , if available. If you have connected t he CARK126 handsfree unit or the headset to the phone, Handset in the option s list is replaced with Handsfree or Headset and the selection key Handset with Handsfr . or Headset respectively. The loudspeaker is deactivated automatically when you end the call or call attempt, connect the handsfree unit or headset to the phone, or close the flip. Using the loudspeaker wit h the stereo radio, see Radio (Menu 7) on page 111 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 44 4. Writing text Your phone is especially designed for easy and comfortable text writing. The easiest way is to write with your thumbs using the messaging keyboard. You can, for example, start writing a message using the keyboard, close the flip and continue writing the same text using ei ther traditional or pred ictive text input. Note that the predict ive text input is n ot available, whe n the flip is open. â Writing text using the messaging keyboard You can write a text message in two ways, when the flip is open. Press Menu an d select Messages , Text messages and Create message , see Writing and sending messages on page 69 . Tip: To quickly start writing a message, move the joystick to the le ft in standby mode. Or: Press any of the letter keys in standby mode to open the Notes application, see Notes (Menu 6) on page 11 0 . The following functions are available when writing text, when the flip is open: ⢠To insert a number, press any of the number ke ys. Pressing a number key in standby mode initiates a normal call procedure. ⢠To switch between the lower and upper case, indicated by , or on the top left of the display, or t o key in symbols, press one of the shift keys or . You can either press the shift key and the desired character
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 45 consecutively, or press and hold both the shift key and the desired letter key at the same time. To write in uppe r case only, press or twice. ⢠To delete characters from the display, press or Clear . Pressing backspace briefly clears one character at a time, while longer keypress deletes characters more quickly. ⢠To add a space, press one of the space keys ( or ) at the bottom of the keyboard. ⢠To force a line feed, press . Typing accented characters The characters available depend on the language selected in the Language menu, see Langu age on page 98 . To type accented characters or symbols that are not printed on the keyboard, do one of t he following: ⢠To access a set of punctuation marks, accented characters and symbols, press the character key . Scroll through the character set by moving the joystick and press Use to select a character. ⢠To type an accen ted character that is not included in the li st of special characters under , such as á , press and hold and simultaneously press â aâ repeatedly until the de sired accented variant of â aâ appears on t he display.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 46 â Writing text when the flip is closed You can use predictive or traditional text inpu t when the phone â s flip is closed .When you are writing text, predictive text input is indicated by and traditional text input by on the top left of the display. You can change the character case, indicated by , or by pressing . The number mode is indicated by , and you can switch between the letter and number modes by pressing and holding . Setting pr edictive text input on or off When writing text, press Options and select Dictionary . ⢠To set the predictive te xt input on, select a language in the dictionary options list. Predictive text input is only available for the languages on the list. ⢠To revert to tr aditional text input, select Dictionary off . Tip: To quickly set the predictive text input on or off when writing text, press twice, or press and hold Options . Using predictive text input You can key in any le tter with a single keypress. Predictive text input is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can also add new words. 1. Start writing a word using the keys to . Press each key only once for one letter. The word may change after each keystroke.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 47 Example: T o write Nokia when the English diction ary is selected, press once for N, once for o, once for k, once for i and once for a. To insert a number while in letter mode, press and hold t he desired number key. For more instructions for writing text, see Tips for writing text on page 48 . 2. When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, confirm it by adding a space with or by moving the joystick to the right. If the word is not the one you are looking for, press repeatedly or press Options and select Matches . When the word you want appears, confirm it. 3. If the ? character is displayed after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add the word to the dictionary, press Spell , key in the word (traditional text input is used) and press Save . When the dict ionary becomes full, the new word replaces the oldest one that was added. 4. Start writing the next word. Writing compound wo rds Key in the first part of the word and confirm it by moving the joystick to the right. Write the last part of the word and confirm it by moving the joystick to the right. Using traditional text input Press a number key, to , repeatedly until the desired character appears. Not all characters a vailable under a number key are printed on the key. The characters available depend on the language selected in the Language menu, see Langu age on page 98 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 48 To insert a number while in lette r mode, press and hold the desired number key. ⢠If the next letter you want is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears, or move the joystick to the right, and then key in the letter. ⢠The most common punctuation marks and special characters are availa ble under the number key . More instructions for writing text, see Tips for writ ing text on page 48 . Tips for writing text The following functions may also be available for writing text in pred ictive or traditional i nput: ⢠To insert a space, press . ⢠To move the cursor to the right, left, up or down, move the joystick respectively. ⢠To delete a character from the display, press Clear . Press and hold Clear to delete the characters more quickly. To delete all the characters simultaneousl y when writing a message, press Options and select Clear text . ⢠To insert a word that is not in the dictionary when using tpredictive text input, press Options and select Insert word . Write th e word using tradition al text input and press Save . The word is also added to the dictionary.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 49 ⢠To insert a special characte r when using tradition al text input, press or when using predictive text input, press and hold , or press Options and select Insert symbol . Move the cursor with the joyst ick to a character and press Use to select it. You can also scroll to a character by pressing , , or , and select it by pressing . The following options are available when wri ting text messages: ⢠To insert a phone number while in the le tter mode, press Options and selec t Insert number . Key in the number or search for it in contacts and press OK . ⢠To insert a name from contacts, press Options and select Insert contact . To insert a phone number or a text it em attached to the name, press Options and select View details .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 50 5. Contacts You can save names and phone numbers (contacts) in both the phone â s memory and in the SIM card â s memory. ⢠You may save up to 500 names with numbers, addresses and text for each name in the phone â s memory. The number of names that can be saved depends on both the length of the names, and t he number and length of the phone numbers and text it ems. Contacts use shared memory, see Shared memory on p age 19 . ⢠The phone supports SIM cards that can save up to 250 names and phone numbers. Names and numbers that are saved in t he SIM card â s memory, are indicated by . â Selecting set tings for conta cts 1. Press Contacts and select Settings . Sel ect 2. Memory in use to select the memory, either SIM card or phone, that you want to use for your contacts. To recall names and numbers from both memories for contacts , select Phone and SIM . In this case, the names and numbers will be saved in the phone â s memory. 3. Contacts view to select how the names (and numbers) in contacts are displayed.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 51 4. Memory status to see how many names and phone numbers are currently saved and how many can still be saved in the sele cted memory for contacts. â Saving names and phone numbers (Add contact) Names and numbers will be saved in the memory in use, see Selectin g settings for contacts above. 1. Press Contacts and select Add contact . 2. Key in the name an d press OK . See Using traditiona l text input on page 47 . 3. Key in the phone number, and press OK . To key in numbers, see Making a call on page 38 . 4. When the name and n umber have been saved, press Done . Tip: Quick save: In standby mode, key in the phone number. Pre ss Options and select Save . Key in the name, press OK and Done . Saving multiple numbers and text items per name You can save different types of phone numbers and short text items for each name in the phone â s internal memory for contacts. The first number save d is automatically set as the default number and it is indicated by a frame around the number type indicator, for example . When you select a name from contacts, for example to make a call, the de fault number is used unless you se lect another number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 52 1. Make sure that the memory in use is either Phone or Phone and SIM . See Selecting settings for contacts on page 50 . 2. To access the list of names and phone numbe rs, move the joystick up or down in standby mode. 3. Scroll to the name saved in the phone â s internal contact s to which you want to add a new number or text item, and pre ss Details . 4. Press Options and select Add number or A dd detail . 5. Select one of the following number types: General Mobile , Home , Office and Fax . or text types E-mail address , Web address , P ostal address and Note . To change the number or text type, select Change t ype in the options li st. 6. Key in the number or t ext item and pre ss OK to save it. 7. Press Back and then Exit to return to standby mode . Changing the default numb er Move the joystick up or down in standby mode, scroll to the name that you want and press Details . Scroll to th e number that you want to set as th e default number. Press Options and select Set as default .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 53 â Searching for a name in contacts 1. Press Contacts and select Search . 2. You can key in the first characters of the name you are searching for in the pop-up window. Move the joystick up or down to scroll through the names in the list, and right or left to move the cursor in the pop-up window 3. Scroll to the name you wa nt, and press Details . Scroll to view th e details of the selected name. Tip: To quickly find a name and phone number, move the joystick up or down in standby mode. Key in the first letter(s) of the name, and/or scroll to the name you want. Tip: To quickly view a specific name with the default number, when the flip is closed, press and hold at the name while scrolling through names. â Editing a name, number or text item Search for the name (and number) that you want to edit and press Details . Scroll to the name, number or text item you want to e dit, and press Options . Select Edit name , Edit number , or Edit detail , and edit the name, number, or text and pre ss OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 54 â Erasing names and numbers Press Contacts and select Delete . ⢠To delete names and numbers one by one, select One by one and scroll to the name (and number) tha t you want to delete. Pre ss Delete and press OK to confirm. ⢠To delete names and numbers in contacts simultaneously, select Delete all and then scroll to contacts, Phone or SIM card and press Delete . Press OK and confirm with the security code. â Copying contacts You can copy names and phone numbers from the phone â s memory to your SIM card â s memory and vice versa. 1. Press Contacts and select Copy . 2. Select the copying direction, From phone to SIM card or From SIM card to phone . 3. Select One by one , All or Default numbers . ⢠If you select One by one , scroll to the name that you want to copy and press Copy . Default numbers is shown if you copy from the phone to the SIM card. Only the default numbers will be copied. 4. To choose whether you want to keep or delete the original names and numbers, select Keep original or Mo ve original .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 55 ⢠If you select All or Default numbers , press OK when Start copying? or Start moving? is displayed. â Sending and receiving a business card You can send and recei ve a person â s contact information as a business card either via IR or as an Over The Air (OTA) message if supported by the network. Receiving a business card To receive a business card via IR, make sure that your phone is ready to receive data through its IR port, see Infrared on page 130 . The user of the other compatible phone can now send the name and phone number via Infrared. When you have received a business card via IR or as an OTA message, press Show . Press Save to save the business card in the phone â s memory. To discard the business card, press Exit and then OK . Sending a business card You can send a business card via IR or as an OTA message to a compatible phone or other handheld device which supports the vCard standard. ⢠To send a business card, search contacts for the name and phone number you want to send, press Details and Options and sel ect Send bus. card . ⢠To send the business card via IR, make sure that the other phone or the PC is set up to receive data via its IR port and select Via infrared . ⢠To send the business card a s an OTA message, select Via text message .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 56 â Speed dialling To assign a number to a speed dialling key, press Contacts , select Speed dials and scroll to the desired speed dialling key number. Press Assign , press Search , and select first the name and then the number you want to assign. If the Speed dialling function is off, the phone asks whether you want to activate it. Press Ye s to activate it, see Spe ed dialling on page 96 . To make a call using the speed dialling keys, see Speed dialling a phone number on page 39 . â Info numbers You can call the information numbers of your service provider. The numbers may be included in your SIM card. Press Contacts and select Info numbers . Scroll through a category to an information number and press to call the number. â Service numbers You can call the service numbers of your se rvice provider. The numbers may be included in your SIM card. Press Contacts and select Service numbers . Scroll t o a service number and press to call the nu mber.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 57 â My numbers The phone numbers assigned to your SIM card are saved in My numbers if this is allowed by the card. To view the numbers press Cont acts and select My numbers . Scroll to the desired name or number, and press View . â Caller groups You can arrange the names and phone numbers saved in contacts into caller groups. For each caller group, you can set the phone to sound a spe cific ringing tone and show a selected graphic on the display whe n you receive a call from a phone number in the group, see below. To set the phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers belonging to a selected caller group, see Alert for in Tone settings on page 10 2 . Press Contacts , sele ct Caller groups and select the desired caller group. Select ⢠Group name , key in a new name for the caller group and pre ss OK . ⢠Group ringing tone and select the ringing tone for the group. Default is the ringing tone selected for the currently active profile. ⢠Group logo and select On to set the phone to display the group logo, Off not to display it or View to view the logo. ⢠Group members to add a name to the caller group, press Options and select Add contact . Scroll to the name that you want to add to the group and press Add . To remove a name from a caller group, scroll to the desired name, press Options and select Remove contact .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 58 6. Using the menu The phone offers you an extensive range of functions, which are grouped into menus. Most of the menu functions are provided wit h a brief help text. To view the help text, scroll to the menu function you want and wait for 15 seconds. To exit the help text, press Back . See Help text activation on page 10 0 . â Accessing a menu function By scrolling 1. To access the menu, press Menu . 2. Scroll through the menu by moving the joystick up or down and select, for example, Setti ngs by pressing Select . 3. If the menu contai ns submenus, select t he one you want, for example Call settings . 4. If the selected submenu contains further submenus, repeat step 3. Sel ect the next submenu, for example Anykey answer . 5. Select the setting of your choice. 6. Press Back to return to the previous menu level, and Exit to exit t he menu. By using a shortcut The menus, submenus and setting options are numbe red and you can access most of them by using their shortcut number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 59 ⢠To access the menu, press Menu . Key in quickly, within two seconds, the index number of the menu function you want to access. Example: To set the Anykey answer to On , press Menu , , , and . Press Back to return to the previ ous menu level, and Exit to exit the menu . Note that accessing the men u functions in menu 1, press Menu , , and the rest of the digits of the shortcut number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 60 â List of menu functions 1. Messages 1. Text messages 1. Create message 2. Inbox 3. Sen t items 4. Archive 5. T emplates 6. My folders 7. Distribut ion lists 8. Delete messages 2. Multimedia msgs. 1. Create message 2. Inbox 3. Outbox 4. Sen t items 5. Saved items 6. Delete messages 3. E-mail 1. Open 1. Create e- mail 2. Retrieve 3. Sen d now 4. Send and re trieve 5. Inbox 6. Outbox 7. Del eted items
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 61 8. Sen t items 9. Drafts 10.Archive 11.Settings 2. Web access 3. Servi ce settings 4. Details 4. Chat 5. Voice messages 1. Listen to voice messages 2. Voice mailbox number 6. Info me ssages 1. Info service 2. T opics 3. Language 4. Info t opics saved on SIM card 5. Read 1 7. Message settings 1. Text messages 2. Multimedia msgs. 3. Oth er settings 8. Service commands 2. Call register 1. Misse d calls 1. This menu is shown only if any info messages are received .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 62 2. Rece ived calls 3. Dia lled numbers 4. Delete recent call lists 1. All 2. Missed 3. Received 4. Dialled 5. Call duration 1. Last call duration 2. Rece ived calls â duration 3. Dialled calls â duration 4. Al l calls â duration 5. Cl ear timers 6. Ca ll costs 1. La st call units 2. Al l calls â units 3. Ca ll cost settings 7. GPRS data cou nter 1. Data sent in last session 2. Data received in last session 3. Al l sent data 4. Al l received data 5. Cl ear counters 8. GPRS con nection timer 1. Duration of last session 2. Duration of all sessions 3. Cl ear timers
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 63 3. Profiles 1. General 1. Activate 2. P ersonalise 3. Timed 2. Sil ent (same submenus as in General) 3. Meet ing (same submenus as in Ge neral) 4. Out door (same submenus as in General) 5. Pager (same submenus as in General) 4. Settings 1. Ti me and date settings 1. Clock 2. Date 3. Au to-update of date & time 2. Ca ll settings 1. Ca ll divert 2. Anykey answer 3. Au tomatic redial 4. Speed dialling 5. Ca ll waiting 6. Summary after call 7. Send my caller identity 8. Line for outgoing calls 1 3. Phone set tings 1. For availability, contact your network operator or service provider.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 64 1. Language 2. Memory st atus 3. Security keyguard 4. Cell info display 5. Welcome note 6. Network se lection 7. Confirm SIM service actions 8. He lp text activation 9. Sta rt-up tone 4. Display settings 1. W allpaper 2. Col our schemes 3. Operator logo 4. Screen saver t imeout 5. Displ ay brightness 5. Tone settin gs 1. Incoming call alert 2. Ri nging tone 3. Ri nging volume 4. Vibrating alert 5. Message alert t one 6. Keypad tones 7. Warning tones 8. Alert for 6. Accessory sett ings 1 1. This menu is shown only if the phone is or has been connected to a headset, handsfree unit or loops et availabl e for the phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 65 7. Secu rity settings 1. PIN code request 2. Call barring service 3. Fix ed dialling 4. Closed use r group 5. Security le vel 6. Acce ss codes 8. Restore factory settings 5. Organiser 1. Alarm clock 2. Calendar 3. To-do list 6. Notes 7. Radio 8. Gallery 1. View folders 1. Graphics 2. Tones 2. Add folder 3. Del ete folder 4. Ren ame folder 5. Gallery downloads 1. Image downloads
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 66 2. Tone downloads 9. Games 1. Select game 2. Game downloads 3. Memory 4. Settings 1. Ga me sounds 2. Ga me lights 3. Shakes 10.Applications 1. Select application 2. App. downloads 3. Memory 11.Extras 1. Calculator 2. Wallet 1. Cards 2. Personal notes 3. Settings 3. Synchronisation 1. Synchronise 2. Settings 4. Coun tdown timer 5. Stopwatch
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 67 12.Connectivity 1. Infrared 2. GPRS 1. GPRS con nection 2. GPRS mode m settings 13.Services 1. Home 2. Bookmarks 3. Service inbox 4. Settings 1. Conn ection settings 2. Appe arance settings 3. Secu rity settings 4. Service inbox settings 5. Go t o address 6. Clear the cache 14.SIM services 1 1. Only shown if su pported by your SIM card. The nam e and contents vary dependi ng on the SIM card
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 68 7. Menu functions â Messages (Menu 1) Note: When sending messages via the SMS netwo rk service, your phone may display the words " Message sent ". This is an indication that the message has been sent by your phone to th e message centre n umber programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination . For more details ab out SMS services, che ck with your service provider. You can read, write, send and save text, mult imedia, and e-mail messages. All messages are organised in folders. Before you can send any text or pict ure messages, you need to save your me ssage centre number, see Me ssage settings on page 86 . Text messages (SMS service) Your phone can send and receive multi-part me ssages which consist of several ordinary text messages (network service). Invoicing is based on the number of ordinary messages that are required for a multi-part message. You can also send and receive tradit ional picture messages that contain text and a picture. Each picture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one text message.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 69 Note: Picture message fun ction can be u sed only if it is sup ported by your ne twork operator or service provid er. Only phones that offer picture message features can receive and display picture m essages. Writing and sending message s The number of available characters and the current part number of a multi-part message are shown on the top right of the display. 1. Press Menu and select Messages , T ext me ssages and Create message . Tip: To quickly start writing a message, move the joystick to the left in standby mode. 2. Key in a message, see W riting text on page 44 . To insert text templates or a picture into th e message, see Te m pl at e s on page 71 . 3. To send the message, pres s Options , and select Send 4. Enter the recipient â s phone number or search for it in contacts. Press OK to send the message. Options for sending a message After you have written a message, press Options and select Sending options . ⢠To send a message to several recipients, select Se nd to many . When you have sent the message to everyone you wan t to send it to, press Done . ⢠To send a message using a distribution list, select Send to lis t . For creating a distribution list, see Distribution lists on page 73 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 70 ⢠To send a message using a message profile, select Sending profile and the n the desired message profile. For defining a message profile, see Message settings on page 86 . Reading and repl ying to a message When you have received a message, the indicator and the number of new messages followed by message(s) received are shown. The blinking indicates that the message memory is full. Before you can receive new messages, delete some of your old messages. The text messages function uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . 1. Press Show to view the new message, or pre ss Exit to view it later. Reading the message later: Press Menu , select Messages , Text messages and Inbox . 2. If more than one message has be en received, select the on e that you want to read. An unread text message is indicated by in front of it. 3. While reading or viewing the message, press Options . You can select an option, for example, to delete, forward or edit the message as a text message, move and rename the message you are reading. Select Copy t o calendar to copy text from the beginning of the message to your phone â s calendar as a memo for the current day. Select Message details to view the sender â s name and phone number, the message centre used, and the date and t ime of receipt.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 71 Select Use detail to extract numbers, e-mail and website addresses from the current message. When viewing a picture message, select Save pict ure to save the picture in the Tem pl a te s folder. 4. Select Reply to re ply to a message. Select Ori ginal text to include the original message in the reply, or select a standard answer to be included in the reply, or select Empty screen . 5. Press Options , select Send , and press OK to send the message to the displayed number. Inbox and sent items folders The phone saves incoming text messages in the Inbox folder and sent messages in the Sent items folder of the Text messages subme nu. Text messages that you wish to send later can be saved in the Archive , My folders or Te m pl at es folder. Templates Your phone includes text templates, indicated by , and picture template s, indicated by . To access the template list, press Menu an d select Messages , Text messages and Tem pl a te s .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 72 Inserting a text templa te into a messa ge ⢠When you are writing or replying to a message, press Options . Select Use template and sel ect the template that you want to insert. Inserting a picture i nto a text message ⢠When you are writing or replying to a message, press Options . Select Ins ert picture and select a picture to view it. Press Insert to insert the picture into your message. The indicator in the header of the message indicates that a picture has been attached. The number of characters that you can include in a message depends on the size of the pict ure. To view the text and the picture together before sending t he message, press Options and select Preview . Archive folder and my folde rs To organise your messages, you can move some of t hem to the Archive folder, or add new folders for your messages. While reading a message, press Options . Select Move , scroll to the folder to which you want to move the message and press Select . To add or delete a folder, press Menu, select Messages , Text messages and My folders . ⢠To add a folder, press Options and select Add folder . ⢠To delete a folder, scroll to the folder that you want to delete, press Options and select Delete folder .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 73 Distributio n lists You can save di stibution lis ts in the phone â s memory, containing a fix ed number of people to whom you regularly send messages. If the message fails to send, an Undelivered folder will appear containing a list of the recipient(s) who did not receive the message. 1. Press Menu , select Messages , Text messages and Distribution lists . 2. Press Add to create a new list. The option is shown, if you have not saved an y lists in the folder. Or: Press Options and select A dd list . 3. Key in the name for the list and press OK . 4. To add a name to the newly created list, press Options and select View list . 5. Press Options and select Add contact . Search for the name in contacts, select it and press OK . The other options in the Optio ns list include View list , Rename list , Clear list and Delete list . In the Undelivered folder you can, for example, select View message to view the message that failed to send or Resend to list to sen d the message again. Multimedia messages Note: This function can be used only if it is suppor ted by your network operat or or service provider . Only phones th at offer compa tible multimedia m essage features can receive and displa y multimedia messages. You can send multimedia messages containing text and a pict ure and receive multimedia message s containing text , a polyphonic ri nging tone and a picture.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 74 The phone supports multimedia messages that are up to 45 kB in size. If the maximum size is exceeded, t he phone may not be able to receive the message. Depending on the network, you may receive a text message that includes an Internet address where you can view the multimedia message. If the message contains a picture that is larger t han the display area, the phone scales it down to fit the display area. Note: If Allow multimedia reception is set to Ye s or In home network , your operator or service provider may charge you for every message you receive. Multimedia messaging supports the following formats: ⢠Picture: JPEG, GIF, PNG and BMP. ⢠Sound: Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI) and monophonic ringing tones If a received message contains any unsupported elements, they may be re placed with the file name and the text Object format not supported Note that you cannot receive any multime dia messages if you have a call in progress, a game or another Java application running, or an active WAP connection over GSM data (see K eying in the servi ce settings manually on page 135 ). Because delivery of multimedia messages can fail for a variety of reasons, do not rely solely upon them for essential commu nications. Writing and sending a multimedi a message To set the settings for multimedia messaging, see Settings for multimedia messages on page 88 . For availability and subscription to the multimedia messaging service, contact your network operator or service provider. 1. Press Menu and select Messages , Multimedia msgs. and Create message .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 75 2. Key in a message, see W riting text on page 44 . You can insert one picture in a multimedia message. To insert a picture, press Options and select Insert image . The list of available folders in the Gallery is shown. Open the desired folder, scroll to the desired picture, press Options and select Insert . The indicator on the header of the message indicates that a picture has been atta ched. To insert a name from contacts, press Options , select More options and Insert contact . Scroll to the desired name, press Options and sel ect Insert contact . To insert a number, press Options , select More options and Insert number . Key in the number or sea rch for it in con tacts and press OK . 3. To view the message before sending it, press Opt ions and select Preview . 4. To send the message, pres s Options and sel ect Send to number (or Send to e- mail ). 5. Enter the recipient â s phone number (or e-mail address) or search for the phone number (or e-mail address) in contacts. Press OK and the message is moved to the Outbox folder for sending. It takes more time to send a mul timedia message than a text message . While the multimedia mes sage is being sent, the anim ated indicator is displ ayed and you can use other functions of the phone. If the re is an interruption, while the message is being sent, the phone tries to resend it a few times. If this fails, the message will rema in in the Outbox folder and you can try to resend it later.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 76 The messages that you have sent will be saved in the Sent items folder if the setting Save sent messages is set to Ye s , see Settings for multimedia messages on page 88 . Reading and repl ying to a multimedi a message When your phone is receiving a mul timedia message, the animat ed indicator is displayed. When the message has been received, the i ndicator and the text Multimedia message received are shown. The blinking indicates that the memory for multimedia messages is full, see Multimedia messages memory full on page 77 . The multimedia message function uses shared me mory, see Shared me mory on page 19 1. Press Show to view the message, or press Exit to view it later. Reading the message later: Press Menu and select Messages , Multimedia msgs. and Inbox . 2. Scroll to view the message. Press Options and some of the following options may be available. ⢠Delete message to delete a saved message. ⢠Reply to reply to the message . To send the reply, press Options and select Send . The sender â s phone number (or e-mail address) is used as the default value. ⢠Forward to no. to forward the message to a phone number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 77 ⢠Edit to edit a message. You can only edit messages you have written. See Writing and sending a mu ltimedia message on page 74 . ⢠Message details to view the subject, size and class of the message. ⢠Details to view the detail s of the attached image or sound ⢠Play to listen to the ringing tone that is contained in the message. ⢠Save sound clip to save a ringing tone in the Gallery . ⢠Save image to save the pi cture in the Gallery . Inbox, Outbox, Sa ved and Sent items fold ers The phone saves the multimedia messages that have been receiv ed in the Inbox folder of the Multimedi a msgs. submenu. Multimedia messages that have not yet been sent are moved to the Outbox folder of the Multimedia msgs. . The multimedia messages that you wish to send later can be saved in the Saved items folder of the Multimedia msgs. submenu. The multimedia messages that have been sent are saved in the Sent items folder of the Multimedia msgs. submenu , if the setting Save sent messages is se t to Yes , see Settings for multimedia messages on page 88 . Multimedia messages memory full When you have a new multimedia message waiting and the memory for the messages is full, the indicator blinks and Multimedia memory full, view waiting msg. is shown. To view the waiting message, press Show . To save the
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 78 message, press Opt ions , s elect Save message and dele te old messages by first selecting the folder and then the message to be deleted. To discard the waiting message, press Exit an d Ye s . If you press No, you can view the message. Deleting messages ⢠To delete text messages, press Menu an d select Messages , Text messages and Delete messages . To delete all t ext messages from all text messag e folders, select All messages and when Delete all messages from all folders? is displayed, press OK . If the folders contain unread messages, the phone will ask whether you want to delete them also. To delete mu ltimedia messa ges, press Menu an d select Messages , Multime dia msgs. and Delete messages . ⢠To delete all messages from a folder, select the folder where you want to delete the messages and press OK to confirm. If the folder contains unread messages, the phone will ask whether you want to delete them also.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 79 E-mail messages Writing and sending an e-mail Note: When sending e mails, your phone m ay display the word s Message se nt . This is an indicati on that the e-mail ha s been sent by your phone to the e-m ail server. This is not an ind ication that the e-mail h as been received at the intended destination. For m ore details about e-mail services, check with your service provider. Before you can send and retrieve any e-mails, you need to do the following: ⢠You need an active e-mail account and e-mail service settings. For the availability of your e-mail account and e-mail service settings, contact your e- mail service provider. ⢠Activate the e-mail service settings that you have obtained from your network operator or e-mail service provider, see Options available for an e-mail application on page 84 . ⢠You also need to set th e e-mail settings on your phone, see E-mail settings on page 82 . You can write your e-mail message before connecting t o the e-mail service, or connect to the service first, and then write and sen d your e-mail. 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Open and Create e-mail . 2. Key in the recipient â s e-mail address, press Options and sele ct Save. Or: Press Options and select Search to search for the e-mail address in contacts and select Save .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 80 3. You can key in the subject for t he e-mail if you want, the n press Options and select Save . 4. Key in the e-mail message, see Writing text on page 44 . The number of characters that you can key in is shown on the top right of the display. 5. To send the e-mail message, press Options and select Send e-mail . Select ⢠Send no w to send the e-mail immediately. If you have not alre ady connected to the e- mail account, your phone establishes the connection first and then sends the e-mail. ⢠Send later to send your e-mail later and the e-mail is saved in the Outbox folder. If you wa nt to edit or continue writing your e-mai l later, you can save it in Drafts by selecting Save draft msg. . Sending the e-mail later: Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Open , Outbox and Send now . Downloading e-mail message s from your e-ma il account The e-mail function uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Open and Retrieve to download e- mail messages that have been sent to your e-mail account. Or: Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Open and Send and retrieve to download new e-mail messages and to send e-mails that have been saved in the Outbox folder. If the message memory is full, delete some or your older messages before you start to download new messages.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 81 2. Your phone makes a connection to the e- mail service. A status bar is shown, while your phone is downloading e-mail messages to your phone. 3. Press Select to view the new message in Inbox , or press Back to view it later. Reading the e-mail later: Press Menu an d select Messages , E-ma il , Open and Inbox . 4. If more than one message is received, select the message that you want to read. An unread text message is indicated by . Replying to an e-mail message 1. While reading or viewing the message, press Options . You can, for example, delete, reply, reply to all, forward or archive the message you are reading. 2. Select Reply to re ply to an e-mail. Select Ori ginal text to include the original message in the reply or select Empty screen . When replying to an e-mail, first confirm or edit the e-mail address and subject, then write your reply. 3. Press Options and select Send e-mail and Send no w to send the message to the displayed number. Inbox, Outbox, Dele ted items, Sent items, Drafts and Archive folders Your phone has the following folders in the E-m ail me nu: ⢠Inbox for saving e-mails that you have downloaded from your e -mail account. ⢠Outbox for saving e-mails that have not been se nt, if you have selected Send later , see Writing and sending an e-mail on page 79 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 82 ⢠Deleted items for e-mails that have bee n deleted. ⢠Sent items for saving e-mails that have been sent. ⢠Drafts for saving unfinished e-mails. ⢠Archive for organising and saving your e-mails. E-mail settings 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Open and Settings . 2. Select Mailbox in use t o v i e w a l i s t o f m a i l b o x e s , t h e n s c r o l l t o t h e o n e t h a t y o u w a n t t o e d i t a n d s e l e c t i t . You have five mailboxes that you can use for the e-mail settings of your phone for saving and retrieving e-mail messages. 3. Select Edit active mailbox and select each of the settings one by one. Key in all the required settings according to the information you have received from your e-mail service provider. ⢠Mailbox name . Key in the name t hat you want to use for the mailbox. ⢠E-mail address . Key in your e-mail address. ⢠My e-mail name . Key in your name or nickname, if you want the recipient to see it. ⢠Outgoing (SMTP) serve r . Key in the mail server address. ⢠Outgoing (SMTP) port . Key in the number of the mail server port for outgoing e-mail. The most common default value is 25.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 83 ⢠Use SMTP authorisation . If your e-mail service provider re quires authentication for sending e-mails, set the setting to on. You must also define your SMTP user name and SMTP password . ⢠SMTP user name . Key in the name that you have obtained from your e- mail service provider to access your mailbox. ⢠SMTP password . Key in the password that you want to use to access your mailbox. If you have not defined a password, you may be asked to define one when your phone connects to your e-mail account. ⢠Include signature . Confirm your selection if you want to add a predefined signature to you r e-mail. ⢠Incoming (POP3/IMAP) server . Key in the e-mail server type for the incoming e-mail (either PO P3 or IMAP4 ) ⢠Incoming (POP3/IMAP) port . Key in the port number that you have obtained from your e-mail service provider. ⢠POP3/IMAP user name Key in the user name. If you have not define d your SMTP user name , the e-mail server uses this user name instead. ⢠POP3/IMAP password . Key in the password. If you h ave not defined your SMTP password , the e-mai l server uses POP3/IMAP password in stead. ⢠Reply-to address . Key in the e-mail address to which you want the replies to be sent, if it differs from your e-mail address. ⢠Incoming server type . Select either POP3 or IMAP4 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 84 ⢠Secure login APOP . Sel ect On if your connection requires a secure login, otherwise leave it to Off . Contact your service provide r if in doubt. This option is shown only, if you have selecte d POP3 as your mailbox type. ⢠Retrieve mails . Select All if you want to retrieve all your e-mails at once or select User defined if y ou want to retrieve on ly some of them at a time. Options available for an e-mail appl ication ⢠Web access to restrict the application for accessing the net work. Select Ask first and the phone will ask you to confirm ne t access, Allowed to allow the net access, or Not allowed not to allow the ne t access. ⢠Service settings to activate the network connection settings for your e-mail function. Select Application to activate the settings that are used for the e- mail function or select Default to confirm that your e-mail function uses the same settings as the WAP browser, see Keying in the servi ce settings manually on page 135 . Contact your e-mail service provider, if in doubt. ⢠Details to give additional information about the application. Chat You can have a conversation with another person using this faster text messaging application. You cannot save received or sent me ssages, but you can view them while chatting. Each chat message is priced as a text message.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 85 1. To start a chat, press Menu , select Messages and Chat . Key in or search in contacts for the phone number of the person with whom you want to chat and press OK . Another way t o start a chat: When you have received a message, press Show to read it. To st art a cha t, pres s Options and select Chat . 2. Key in your nickname for the chat and press OK . 3. Write your chat message, see Writing text on page 44 . 4. To send the message, pres s Options and sel ect Send . 5. The reply message from the other person is shown above your original message. To reply to the message, press OK and repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. To end the chat session, press Opt ions and select Quit . To view the most recent messages of the current chat session, press Options and select Chat history . The messages that you sent are indicated by "<" and your nickname, and the messages that you received are indicated by ">" and the sender â s nickname. Press Back to return to the message you are currently writing. To edit your nickname, select the option Chat name . Voice messages Voice mailbox is a network service and you may need to subscribe to it. For more information and for the voice mailbox numbe r, contact your service provider. Press Menu and select Messages and Voice messages . Select
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 86 ⢠Listen to voice messages to call your voice mailbox at the phone number that you have saved in the V oice mailbox number me nu. Each phone line may have its own voice mailbox number, see Line for outgoing calls on page 97 . ⢠V oice mailbox number to key in, search for or edit your voice mailbox number and press OK t o s a v e i t . If supported by the network, the indicator will show new voice messages. Press Listen to call your voice mailbox number. Tip; Pressing and holding calls your voice mailbox, when the flip is closed. When the flip is open, press and hold t he corresponding number key. Info messages With the info message network service you can receive messages on various topics from your service provider, for example weather or traffic conditions. For available topics and the relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. If the GPRS connection is set t o Always online , the info messages may not be received. In that case, set the GPRS connect ion to When needed , see GPRS connection on page 132 . Message settings The message settings affect the sending, receiv ing and viewing of messages.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 87 Settings f or text message s 1. Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings , Text messages an d Sending profile . 2. If more than one message profile set is supported by your SIM card, select the set you want to cha nge. ⢠Select Message centre numbe r to save the phone number of the message centre that is required for sending text messages. You will receive this number from your service provider. ⢠Select Messages sent as to select the message type: Tex t , E-mail , P aging or Fax . ⢠Select Message validity to select the length of time for which the network should attempt to deliver your message. ⢠For message type Text , select Default recipient number to save a default number for sending messages for this message profile. For message type E-mail , select E-mail server to sa ve the e-mail server number. ⢠Select Delivery reports to ask the network to send delivery reports about your messages (network service). ⢠Select Use GPRS to set GPRS as the preferred SMS bearer. When the se tting is set to on and the GPRS con nection setting is Always online , the phone sends a text message over GPRS connection, if this is possible . See also GPRS on page 132 . ⢠Select Reply via same centre to allow the recipient of your message to send you a reply via your message centre (network service).
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 88 ⢠Select Rename se nding profile to change the name of the sele cted message profile. The message profile sets are only displayed if your SIM card supports more than one set. Overwrite setti ngs When the text me ssage memory is full, th e phone cannot receive or send any new messages. However, you can set the phone to automatically replace old t ext messages in the Inbox an d Sent items folders with the new ones. Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings , Text messages and Overwriting in inbox or Overwriting in se nt items . Sel ect Allo wed to set the phone to replace the old text messages with new ones in the Inbox or the Sent items folder, respectively. Settings f or multimedia messages Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings and Multimedia msgs. . Select ⢠Save sent messages . Select Ye s to set the phone to save sent multimedia messages in the Sent items folder. If you select No , the sent messages are not saved. ⢠Allow multimedia reception . Select No , Ye s or In home network to use the multimedia service . If you sele ct In home network , you cannot receive multimedia messages outside your home network. ⢠Incoming multimedia messages . Sele ct Retrieve to set the phone t o automatically fetch newly received multimedia messages, or select Reject if you do not wish to receive multimedia messages.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 89 ⢠Connection settings . Define WAP connection settings for retrieving multimedia messages. Activate the set where you want to save the connection settings and th en edit the settings. ⢠Settings â name . Key in a new name for the connection set and press OK . ⢠Homepage . Key in the homepage address of the WAP service that you want to use, press for a dot, and press OK . ⢠Session mode . Select Pe r m a n e n t or Temporary . ⢠Data bearer . Select GPRS . ⢠Bearer settings . Select the sett ings for the selected data beare r. ⢠GPRS access point . Key in the access point name to est ablish a connection to a GPRS network and press OK . You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. ⢠IP address . Key in the address, press for a dot, and press OK . You obtain the IP address from your network operator or service provide r. ⢠Authentication type . Select Secure or Normal . ⢠User name . Key in the user name and press OK . ⢠P assword . Key in the password and press OK . ⢠Allow adverts . You can receive or reject advertisement s. To receive the multim edia connecti on settings as a text me ssage You may receive the multimedia connection se ttings as a text message from the network operator or service provider that offers the WAP service you want to use. For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. You can
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 90 also visit Club Nokia â s website (www.club.nokia.com). Availability may vary by country. Font size setting To select the font size for reading and writing messages, press Me nu and sel ect Messages , Message settings , Other settings , and Font size . Service commands Press Menu and select Messages and Service commands . Key in and send service requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your service provider. â Call register (Menu 2) The phone registers the phone numbers of missed, received and dialled calls, and the approximate length and cost of your calls. The phone registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the phone is switched on and within t he network â s service area. When you press Options in the Missed calls , R eceived calls and Dialled numbers menu, you can, for example, view the date and the time of the call, edit or delete the phone number from the list, save the number in contacts, or send a message to the number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 91 Recent calls lists Press Menu and select Call register an d then select ⢠Missed calls to view th e list of the last ten ph one numbers from which somebody has tried to call you (net work service). The number in front of the (name or) phone number indicates the amount of call attempts from that caller. Tip: When a note about missed calls is displayed, press List to access the list of phone numbers. Scroll to the number y ou would like to call back and press . ⢠Received calls to vi ew the list of the last te n phone numbers from which you have most recently accepted calls (network service ). ⢠Dialled numbers to vi ew the list of the last 20 phone numbers that you have most recently called or attempted t o call. See also Last number redialling on page 38 . ⢠Delete recent call lists t o delete the recent calls lists. Select whether you want to delete all the phone numbers in the recent calls lists, or only the numbers in the missed calls, received calls or dialled numbers lists. You cannot undo the operation. Call counters and call timers Note: The actu al invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, dependin g upon netw ork features, rounding-o ff for billing , taxes and so forth.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 92 Press Menu and select Call register an d then select ⢠Call duration . Scroll to view the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls in hours, minutes and seconds. The security code is required to clear the timers. Each phone line has it s own call timers and the timers of the selected l ine are displayed. See Line for outgoing calls on page 97 . ⢠Call costs (network service). Select Last call unit s or All calls â unit s to check the cost of your most recent call or all calls in terms of units specified within the Show costs in function. Select Call cost setti ngs and select Clear counters to clear the cou nters, or select Show costs in to set the phone to show the remaining talk t ime in terms of charging units or units of currency. Contact your service provider for charging unit prices. Select Call cost limit to limit the cost of your calls to a certain amount of charging units or units of currency. The PIN2 code is required for the call cost settings. Note: When no mor e charging units or currency units are left, calls may on ly be possible to the emer gency number program med into your phone (e.g. 112 o r other official emergency number). ⢠GPRS data counter . Scroll to check the size of data that were sent or received in bytes, sent and received data in total, and to clear the counters. The security code is required to clear the counters.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 93 ⢠GPRS connection timer . Scroll to check the duration of the last GPRS connection or the total GPRS connection time. You can also clear the timers. The security code is required to clear the timers. â Profiles (Menu 3) Your phone has a group of profiles that allow you to personalise the tone settings of you r phone and to activate a profile for different events and en vironments. Available profil es are General , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , and Pager . Press Menu and select Profiles . Scroll to a profile and press Select . ⢠To activate the selected profile, select Ac ti va t e . ⢠To set the profile to be active for a certain amount of time up to 24 hours, select Timed and set t he end time. When the ti me set for the profile e xpires, the previous profile that was not timed becomes active. ⢠To personalise the profile, select P ersonalise . Select the setting that you want to change and make the changes. The settings can also be changed in the To ne se t ti ng s menu, see Tone settings on page 102 . In addition you can rename a profile using a Profile name . The General profile cannot be re named.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 94 Tip: To quickly change the profile in standby mode ⢠when the flip is closed, press the power key , scroll to the profile that you want to activate and press Select . ⢠when the flip is open, press the profile key , scroll to the profile that you want to activate and press Select . â Settings (Menu 4) Time and date settings Clock Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Time and date settings and Clock . Select Show clock (or Hide clock ) to show (or hide) the time on the top right of the display in standby mode. Select Set the time to adjust the clock to the correct time, and Time format to select 12-hour or 24-hour time format. The clock is also used for the funct ions Messages , Call register , Alarm clock , timed Profiles , Calendar , screen saver and Notes , for example. If the battery is removed from the phone for a lon g time, you may need to reset the time.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 95 Date Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Time and date settings and Date . Select Show date (or Hide date ) to show (or hide) the date on the display in standby mode. Select Set the date to adjust the da te. You can also sele ct the da te format. Auto update of date and time Press Me nu and select Settings , Time and date settings and Auto-update of date & time (network service). To set the phone to automatically update the time and date according to the current time zone, select On . To set the phone to ask for a confirmation before the update, select Confirm first . The automatic update of date an d time does not change the time you have set for the alarm clock, calendar or the alarm notes. They are in local time. Updating may cause some alarms that you have set t o expire. Call settings Call divert Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and Call divert (network service). With call divert, you can direct your incoming calls to another number, for example, to your voice mailbox number. For details, cont act your service provider. Divert options that are not supported by your SI M card or your network operator may not be shown. Select the divert option that you require, such as Divert if busy to diver t the vo ice calls when your number is busy or when you reject an incoming call.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 96 To set the divert set ting to on, select Activate and then select the timeout aft er which the call is dive rted, if this is available for the call divert option. To set the call divert to off, select Cancel . To check whether the call divert is activated or not, select Check status if this is available for the divert option. Several divert opt ions may be active at the same time. To see the dive rt indicators in standby mode, see Essent ial indicators in standby mode on page 24 . Anykey answer Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and then Anykey answer . Select On and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key, ex cept , selection keys and , and . Automatic redial Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and Automatic redial . Select On and your phone will make a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. Speed dialling Press Menu , select Settings , Call se ttings and Speed dialling . Select On and the names and phone numbers assigned to the speed dialling keys, from to with the flip closed, or the corresponding number keys of the keyboard, can be dialled by pressing and holding the corresponding number key.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 97 Call waiting Press Menu and sele ct Settings , Call settings and Call wait ing . Selec t Act i va te and the network will notify you of an incoming call while you have a call in progress (network service). See Call waiting on page 41 . Summary after call Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and Summary after call . Select On and after each call the phone will briefly display the duration and cost (network service) of the call. Send my call er identity Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and Send my caller identity . Select Ye s and your phone number will be displayed to t he person you are calling (network service). Select Set by network and the set ting agreed upon with your service provider is used. Line for outgo ing calls Line for outgoing calls is a network service to select the phone line 1 or 2, that is the subscriber number, for making calls. Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and Line for outgoing calls . If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. However, calls on both lines can be answered regardless of the selected line. If supported by your SIM card, you can prevent the line selection by selecting the Lock option.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 98 For more information on availability, contact your network operator or service provider. Tip: In standby mode, you can switch from one line to the other by pressing and holding . Phone sett ings Language Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Phone settings and Language . Select the language for the display texts. If Automatic is selected, the phone selects the language according to the information on the SIM card. Memory status Press Menu , and select Settings , Phone settings and Memory status . Scroll to view the amount of free memory, the total used memory and the used memory for each function. You may also find the memory information in the menu of some functions, for example in th e Gallery menu. Security keyguard When the keypad is locked, appears on top of the display. When you have set the security keyguard setting to On and activated it, t he keypad lock remains active if you open the flip. Note that if you have activated the security keyguard, it does not protect your phone data from PC Suite access. 1. Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Phone settings and Security keyguard .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 99 2. Key in the security code and press OK . The security keyguard code is the same as your security code, see Security se ttings on page 10 4 . 3. Select On , if you want to activate the security keyguard. To activate the security keyguard, press Menu and , when the flip is closed. To deactivate the keyguard, press Unlock and OK , if the flip is open. If the flip is closed, press Unlock and , then key in the security code. Cell info displa y Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Phone settings and Cell info display . Select On to set the phone to indicate when it is use d in a cellular network based on Micro Cellular Network (MCN) technology. If the GPRS connection is set t o Always online , the cell identity may not be received. In that case, set the GPRS connect ion to When needed , see GPRS connection on page 132 . Welcome note Press Menu an d select Settings , Phone settings and Wel c om e n o te . Key in the note that you would like to be shown briefly whe n the phone is switched on. To save the note, press Optio ns , an d select Save . Network sel ection Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Phone settings and Network selection . S elect Automatic and the phone aut omatically selects one of the cellular networks available in your area.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 100 If you select Manual , you can select a network that has a roaming agreement with your home network operator. If No access is displayed, you must select another network. The phone stays in manual mode until the automatic mode is selected or another SIM card is inserted into the phone. Confirm SIM service actions See SIM services (Menu 14) on page 148 . Help text activatio n To set the phone to show or not to show the help texts, press Menu an d select Settings , Phone settings and Help text activation . See also Using the menu on page 58 . Start-up tone To set the phone to play or not to play a start -up tone when the phone is switched on, press Menu and selec t Settings , Phone settings and Start-up tone . Display settings Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background image, known as wallpaper, when the phone is in standby mode. Some images are pre-saved in the Gallery menu. You can also receive images via multimedia messages, download them via the WAP service or use PC Suite from to transfer t hem from your PC and then save them in Gallery . Your phone supports JPEG, GIF, BMP and PNG formats.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 101 To select wallpaper 1. Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Display settings and Wallpaper . 2. Select Change image to view the folder list in the Gallery menu. 3. Open the image folder and scroll to the desire d image 4. To set the image as wallpaper, press Options and select Set as wallpaper Note that the wallpaper is not displayed when the ph one activates the screen saver. To activate or deactiva te the wall paper Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Display settings and Wallpaper . To activate / deactivate the wallpaper, select On / Off respectively. Colour schemes You can change the colour of some display components, for example indicators and signal bars. Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Display settings and Colour schemes . Sel ect the desired colour scheme. Operator logo To set your phone to display or hide the operator logo, press Menu and sel ect Settings , Display settings and Operator logo . If you have not saved any operator logos, the Operator logo menu is dimmed. Note that the operator logo is not displayed when the phone activates the screen saver. For more information on availability of an operator logo via SMS, MMS or WAP, contact your network operator or your WAP servic e provider.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 102 Screen saver A digital clock screen saver is used for power saving in standby mode. It is activated when no function of the phone has been used for a certain time while the phone â s flip is closed. Press any key to de activate the screen saver or open the flip. The screen saver is also deactivated when the phone is out of the network coverage area. Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Display settings and Screen saver timeout . Select the timeout after which the screen saver will be activated. The length of the timeout can vary from 5 seconds to 60 minute s. Note that the screen saver overrides all graphics and texts on the display in standby mode. Display bri ghtness You can change the brightness level of the phone display. Press Menu and select Settings , Display settings and Display brightness . Move the joystick to the left to decrease and to the right to increase the brightness level , and press OK to accept it. Tone settin gs Press Menu and select Setti ngs and Ton e s et t in gs . You can find the same settings in the Profile s menu, see Profiles (Menu 3) on page 93 . Note that the settings you make, will change the settings in the active profile. Select Incoming call alert to choose how the phone notifies you of an incoming voice call. The options are Ringing , As c en di ng , Ring once , Beep once and Off .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 103 Select Ring ing tone for incoming voice calls. To select ringing tones that have been saved in the Gal lery , selec t Open gallery from the ringing tone list. Select Ringing volume and Vibrating alert for incoming voice calls and incoming messages. The vibrating alert does not work whe n the phone is connected to a charger, a desktop stand, or a car kit. Tip: If you donwload a ringing tone or receive one via OTA, you can save it in the Gallery . Select Message alert to ne to set the alert tone for incoming messages, Keypad tones , or Warning tones to set the pho ne to sound tones for example whe n the battery is running out of power. Select Alert for to set the phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected caller group. Scroll to the caller group that you want or All calls and press Mark . Accessory settings Accessory settings menu is only shown if the phone is or has been connect ed to one of the following accessories: headsets HDB-4 or HDS-3, handsfree unit CARK126 or mobile inductive loopset LPS-4. Press Menu and select Setti ngs and A ccessory settings . You can select Headset , Handsfree or Loopset if the corresponding accessory is or has been connected to the phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 104 ⢠Select Default profile to select the profile that you want to be au tomatically activated when you connect to the selected acce ssory. You can select another profile while the accessory is connected. ⢠Select Automatic answer to set the phone to automaticallt answer an incoming call after five seconds. If the Incoming call alert is set to B eep once or Off , automatic answer will not be used. ⢠Select Lights to set the ligh ts permanently to On . Select Automatic to set the lights on for 15 seconds aft er a keypress. The Lights option is available only when Handsfree is sele cted. Security settings Note: When security features that restrict calls are in u se (call barring, close d user group and fixed dialling), cal ls may be possibl e to certain emerge ncy numbers in some networks (e. g. 112 or other o fficial emergency numbers). Press Menu and select Setti ngs and Security settings . Select ⢠PIN code request to se t the phone to ask for your PIN code every time the phone is switched on. Some SIM cards do not allow the PIN code request t o be turned off. ⢠Call barring service (network service) to restrict incoming calls to and outgoing calls from your phone. A barring password is required. ⢠Fixed dialling to re strict your outgoing calls and text messages to selected phone numbers if this function is supported by your SI M card. The PIN2 code is required.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 105 When the fixed dialling is on, GPRS connect ions are not possible except whi le sending text messages over a GPRS connection. In this case, t he recipient â s phone number and th e message centre number must be included in th e fixed dialling list. ⢠Closed user group . Closed user group is a ne twork service that specifies the group of people whom you can call and who can call you. For more information contact your network operator or service provide r. ⢠Security level . Select Phone and the phone will ask for t he security code whenever a new SIM card is inserted into the phone. Select Memory to set t he phone to request the securit y code when the SIM card â s memory is selected and you want to change the memory in use, see Selecting settings for contacts on page 50 or copy from one memory to another, Copying contacts on page 54 . ⢠Access codes to change the security code, PIN code, PIN2 code or barring password. Codes can only include numbers from 0 to 9. Restore factory s ettings To reset the menu settings to their original values, press Menu and select Settings and Restore factory settings . Key in the se curity code and press OK . Note that the data you have keyed in or downloaded, for ex ample the names and phone numbers saved in contacts, are not dele ted.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 106 â Organiser (Menu 5) Alarm clock The alarm clock uses the time format that has been set for the clock. The alarm clock works even when the phone is switched off. Press Menu and select Organiser and Alarm clock . ⢠Select Alarm time , key in the alarm time and press OK . To change the alarm time, sele ct On . ⢠Select Alarm t one and you can select a default alarm tone, personalise your alarm tone by selecting one from a ringing tone list or from the gallery, or set the radio as your alarm tone. If you select the radio as an ala rm tone, your phone plays the las t radio channel that you have listened to via loudspeaker. If the headset is removed, the default alarm tone will be used instead of the radio. When the alarm time expires The phone will sound an aler t tone, and flash Alarm! and the current time on the display. Press Stop to stop the alarm. If you let the alarm continue for a minute or if you press Snooze , the alarm stops for about ten minutes and then resumes. If the alarm time is rea ched while the phone is switche d off, the phone switches itsel f on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you press Stop , the phone asks whether you want to activate the phone for calls, Switch the phone on? . P ress No to switch of f the phone or Ye s to make and receive cal ls.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 107 Note: Do not press Ye s wh en wireless phone use i s prohibited or w hen it may cause interference or danger. Calendar The calendar helps you to keep track of reminders, calls that you ne ed to make, meetings, and birthdays. The calendar uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . Press Menu and select Organiser and Calendar . Tip: To quickly view the current Calendar month, move the joystick to the right in standby mode. Scroll to the day you want. The current day is indicated by a frame around the day. If there are any notes se t for the day, the day is in bold type. To view the notes for the day, press Options and select Day notes . To view a si ngle no te, scrol l to the no te that yo u want to v iew, press Options and select View . The note view allows you to view the details of the selected note. You can scroll through t he note. The other options for the calend ar views may include: ⢠Options for making a note, or for sending a note via IR, or as a note directly to another phone â s calendar or as a text message. ⢠Options for deleting, editing, moving and repeating a not e and for copying a note to another day. ⢠Settings to set the date, time, date or time format, or the first day of the week. In the Auto-d elete option you can set the phone to automaticallt delete old
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 108 notes after a specified time. However, the repeated notes, for example birthday notes, will not be deleted. Making a calend ar note For keying in letters and numbers, see Writing text on page 44 . Press Menu and select Organiser and Calendar or move the joystick to the right in standby mode to go to the monthly view. Scroll to the date that you want, press Options and select Make a note . Select one of the following note types: ⢠Meeting - Key in the note, press Options and select Save (or search for the name in contacts and press OK ). Key in the location of the meeting, press Options and select Save . Key in the start time for the meeting and press OK , and then key in the end time and press OK . To set the alarm for the note, select With to ne or Silent (no alarm tone ) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Call - Key in the phone number, press Options and sele ct Save . Key in the name, press Options and select Save . (Instead of keying in the phone number, you can search for the name and number in contacts). Then key in the time for the call and press OK . To set the alarm for the note, select With tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Birt hday - Key in the person â s name (or press Op tions and search for it in contacts an d press OK ), press Options and select Save . Then key in the year of birth, and press OK . To set the alarm for the note , select With tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Memo - Key in the note, press Options and select Save (or search for the name in contacts and press OK). Key in the end day for the note and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 109 To set the alarm for th e note, select With tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Reminder - Key in the subject for the reminder, press Options and select Save (or search for the name in contacts and press OK ). To set the alarm for th e note, select Alarm on and then set the alarm time. When you have set the alarm, the indicator is displayed when you view the notes. When the pho ne sounds an alarm fo r a note The phone beeps, and displays the note. Wheh a call note indicator is shown on the display, you can call the displayed number by pre ssing . To stop the alarm and view the note, press View . To stop the alarm without viewing the note, press Exit . To-do list You can save a note for a task that you have to do, se lect a priority level for the note and mark it as done when you have completed it. You can sort the notes by priority or by date. The to-do list uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . Press Menu and select Organiser and To-do list to view the list of notes. Press Options or scroll to the desired note and then press Options . ⢠To add a new note, select Add . Key in the subject for the note. When you have keyed in the maximum number of characters for a note, no further characters will be accepted. Press Options and select Save . Select the priority for the note
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 110 High , Medium or Low . The phone aut omatically sets the time of expiry without an alarm for the note. For Dictionary , see Setting predictive text input on or off on page 46 . ⢠You can also view and delete the selected note and dele te all the notes that you have marked as completed. You can sort the notes by priority, send them to another phone, save them as a calendar note, or access the calendar. While viewing a note, you can also select an option to edit the selected note, edit the deadline or priority for th e note, or mark the note as completed. â Notes (Menu 6) Note: Your phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do not switc h the phone on when wireless phone use is proh ibited or when it may cause interferen ce or danger. You can use t he Notes application for writing and sending notes via IR, SMS or MMS. The Notes application uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . 1. To access Notes , press Menu and select Notes or type any character when the messaging keyboard is open. The phone will ask you to set the date and time, if they have not already be en set when you start to write a note. 2. Press Options and select Make a note , see Writ ing text on page 44 . 3. Key in the note a nd select Save .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 111 You can insert the current time and date to the note. If there is not e nough space to insert t hem to the note, the phone will ask you to delet e the appropriate number of characters from your note. You can also send the note via IR, MMS, or as a text message (SMS). If the note is too long to be sent as a text message, the phone will ask you to delete the appropiate number of characters from your note . The other options for notes include options for viewing, de leting, and editing a note. While editing a n ote, you can also exit the text editor without saving the changes. â Radio (Menu 7) Note: Your phone must be switched on to use th is function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phon e use is prohibited or when it may cause interferen ce or danger. To listen to the radio on your phone, conne ct the headset HDS-3 (stereo) or HDB-4 (mono) to the headset connector on the bottom of the phone. The lead of the headset functions as th e radio antenna, so let it han g freely. Note that the quality of the radio broadcast depends on the radio station â s coverage in that parti cular area. 1. To turn on the radio, pre ss Menu an d select Radio . The following are shown on the display: ⢠The channel location number and the name of the radio channel.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 112 ⢠The frequency of the radio channel. 2. If you have pre-saved radio channels, you can scroll to the channe l that you would like to listen to, or select a radio channel location from 1 to 9 by pressing the corresponding number key. When using the hea dset HDB-4 or HDS-3, press the headset key to scroll to the desired saved radio channel that you have saved. 3. When the radio is on, press Options and selec t Switch off to turn off the radio. Tip: To return to standby mode, press briefly; to quickly turn off the radio, press and hold . Tuning a radio ch annel When the radio is on, move the joystick up or down to start the channel search. Searching stops when a channel has been found. To save the channel, press Options , and select Save channel . Key in the name of the channel and press OK . Select the location where you want to save the channel. Tip: To quickly save the channel in locations 1 to 9, press and hold the corresponding number key, then key in the name of the channel and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 113 Using the radio When the radio is on, press Options and select ⢠Switch off to turn off the radio. ⢠Save channel to save the radio channel that you have found, refer to T uning a radio channel above. Up to 20 radio channe ls can be saved. ⢠Automatic tuning . Move t he joystick up or down to start searching upwards or downwards for channels. The search stops when a channel has been found, press OK . To save the channel, see Save channel above. ⢠Manual tuning . Move the joystick up or down to start searching upwards or downwards for channels, or hold the joystick in the up or down position to search for channels more quickly. To save the channel, press OK an d see Save channel above. Tip: To quickly select Manual tuning , press when in the Radio menu. ⢠Set frequency . If you know the frequency of the radio channel to which you would like to listen (bet ween 87.5 MHz and 108.0 MHz), key it in and press OK . To save the ch annel, see the Save channel option. Tip: To quickly select Se t frequency , press when in the Radio menu. ⢠Delete channel . To delete a saved channel, scroll to the desired channel, select Delete and OK . ⢠Rename . Key in a new name for the saved channel and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 114 ⢠Loudspeaker (or Headset ) to listen to the radio through a loudspeaker (or headset). Keep the h eadset connected to the ph one, because the lead of the headset functions as th e radio antenna. Note that i f you receive an incomin g call, it is always routed to the headset. ⢠Mono output (or Stereo o utput ) to listen to the radio in mono (or in ste reo). You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio, the radio is muted. When you end the call, the radio will automatically be turned back on. You can also use other functions of the phone, for example, write me ssages or play games, while listening to the radio. When an application using a GPRS or HSCSD connection is sending or receiving data, it may interfere with the radio. â Gallery (Menu 8) Note: Your p hone must be swi tched on to us e this function. D o not switch the phone on w hen wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. You can save images and ringing tones, for example, that have been received in multimeadia messages, in the folders of the gallery, see Reading and replying to a multimedia message on page 76 . The gallery uses shared me mory, see Shared me mory on page 19 . 1. Press Menu and select Gallery . The list of options is shown. 2. Select View folders to ope n the list of folders.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 115 Other available options are: ⢠Add folder to add a new folder. Key in a name for the folder and press OK . ⢠Delete folder to select a folder you want to delete. You cannot delete the folders that were originally on the phone. ⢠Rename folder to select a folder you want to rename. You cannot rename the folders that were originally on the phone. ⢠Gallery downloads to download more images and tones. Select Image downloads or Tone do wnloads . The list of available WAP bookmarks is shown. Select More bookmarks to access the li st of WAP bookmarks in the Services menu, se e Bookmarks on page 142 . Select the appropriate bookmark to connect to the desired WAP site. If the connection fails, you may not be able to access the WAP page from the WAP service whose conne ction settings are currently active. In this case, enter the Services menu and activate another set of service settings, see Connecting to a WAP service on page 138 . Try again t o connec t to the WAP site. For the availability of different WAP services, pricing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the WAP servic e provider. 3. Open the desired folder an d the list of files in the folder is shown. Graphics and Ton e s are the origi nal folders in the phon e. 4. Scroll to the desired file. Press Options and some of the following options are available: ⢠Open to open the selected file.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 116 ⢠Delete to delete th e selected file. ⢠Move to move a file to another folder. ⢠Rename to give a ne w name to the file. ⢠Set as wallpaper to set the selected file as wallpape r. ⢠Set as ring tone to set th e selected file as the ringing tone. ⢠Details to see the det ails of the file, for example, the si ze of the file. ⢠Sort to sort the files and folders by date, type, name or size. â Games (Menu 9) Note: Your phone must be switched on to use t his function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interferen ce or danger. Launching a gam e 1. Press Menu and select Games and Se lect game . 2. Scroll to a game or a game set (the name depends on the game). 3. Press Options and select Open or press . If the selection is a single game, it will be lau nched. Otherwise, a list of games in the selected game set is displayed. To launch a single game, scroll to the desired game and press Options and sele ct Open , or press .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 117 Note that running some games may consume the phone âÂÂs batt ery faster (and you may need to connect the phone to the charger). Other options available for a game o r game set For Options for games, see Other options available for an application or application set on page 11 9 . Game downloads Press Menu and select Games and Game downloads . The list of available WAP bookmarks is shown. Select More bookmarks to access the list of WAP bookmarks in the Se rvices menu, see Bookmarks on page 142 . Select the appropriate bookmark to connect to t he desired WAP site. If the connection fails, you may not be able to access the WAP site from the WAP service whose connection settings are currently active. In this case, enter the Services menu and activate another set of service settings, see Connec ting to a W AP service on 138 . Try again to connect to the WAP site. For the availability of different WAP services, pricing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the WAP service provider. Note that when downloading a game or an application, it may be saved in the Applications menu inste ad of the Games menu.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 118 Memory stat us for games To view the amount of memory available for game and application installations, press Menu and select Games and Memory . See also Memory status for applications on page 12 1 . The games use shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . Game settings Press Menu and sel ect Games and Settings to set sounds, lights and shakes for the game. â Applications (Menu 1 0) Note: T h e p h o n e m u s t b e s w i t c h e d o n t o u s e t h i s f u n c t i o n . D o not switch on the phone when the use of a wireless p hone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or d anger. This menu allows you to manage Java applications installed on your phone. Your phone software includes some Java applications that were specially designed for this Nokia phone. Various service providers offer other applications via WAP services or they can be downloa ded to your phone f rom a PC using a da ta cable or an IR connection. Before you can use any of these applications you have to download them onto your phone .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 119 Launching an application 1. Press Menu and select Applications and Select application . 2. Scroll to an application or an application set (the name depends on the application). 3. Press Options and select Open or press . If the selection is a single application, it will be launched. Otherwise, a list of appli cations in the selected appl ication set is displayed. To launch a single application, scroll to the desired application and press Options and select Open or press , Note that running some applications may consume the phone â s battery faster (and you may need to con nect the phone to the ch arger). Other options available for an a pplication or app lication set ⢠Delete to delete the application or application set from your phone. Note that if you delete a pre-installed application or an application set from your phone, you may download it again to your phone from the Nokia Software Market, www.softwaremarket.nokia.c om/wap or www.softwaremarket.nokia.com/6800. ⢠Web access to restrict the application from accessing the net work. Select Ask first and the phone will ask you for net access, Allo wed to allow the net access, or Not allowed not to allow the ne t access. ⢠Update version to check if a new version of the application is availa ble for download from the WAP services.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 120 ⢠Web page to provide further information or additional data for the application from an Internet page. This is a network service and the me nu is shown only if an Internet address has been provided with the application. ⢠Details to give additional information about the application. Downloading an application You can download new Java applications in different ways: ⢠Press Menu and select Applications and App. downloads and the list of available WAP bookmarks is shown. Select More bookmarks to access the list of WAP bookmarks in the Services me nu, see Bookmarks on page 142 . Select the appropriate bookmark to connect to t he desired WAP site. If the connection fails, you may not be able to access the WAP page from t he WAP service whose connection settings are currently acti ve. In this case, enter the Services menu and act ivate another set of service settings, see Connecting to a WAP service on 138 . Try again to connect to the WAP site. For the availability of different WAP services, pricing and tariffs, c ontact your network operator and/or the WAP service provider. ⢠Press Menu and select Services to find a WAP page to download an appropriate Java application, see Browsing the pages of a WA P service on page 139 . ⢠Use the game download function, see Game do wnloads on page 11 7 . ⢠Use the Nokia Application installer from PC Suite to download the applications to your phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 121 Note that Noki a does not warran t for application s from non-No kia sites. If you choose to dow nload Java applicatio ns from them, you should take th e same precautions, f or security or content, as you would with any site. Note that when downloading a game or an application, it may be saved in the Games menu instead of the Applications menu. Memory stat us for applica tions To view the amount of memory available for game and application installations, press Menu and select Applications and Memory . The applications use sh ared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . â Extras (Menu 1 1) Note: Your phone must be switched o n to use the fu nctions in Extras menu. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it ma y cause interference or da nger. Calculator The calculator in your phone adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, calculates the square and the square root, and converts currency values. This calculator has a limited accuracy and rounding er rors may occur, espe cially in long divisions. 1. Press Menu and select Extras an d Calculator .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 122 2. When â 0â is displayed on the screen, key in the first number of the calculation, press for a decimal point or the corresponding symbol on the keyboard, if the flip is open. 3. Press Options and select Add , Subtract , Multiply , Divide , Square , Square root or Change sign . If the flip is open, you can also use the corresponding calculation symbols of the keyboard, if available. Tip: Alternatively, press once to add, twice to subtract, thre e times to multiply or four times to divide , if you use the calculator with the flip closed. 4. Key in the second number. 5. For the total, press Options and select Equals . Repeat steps 3 to 5 as many times as is necessary. 6. To start a new calculation, first press and hold Clear . Perfoming a currency conversion 1. Press Menu and select Extras an d Calculator . 2. To save the exchange rate, press Options and select Exchange rate . Selec t either of the displayed options. Key in the ex change rate, press for a decimal point, and press OK . The exchange rate remai ns in the memory until you replace it with another one. 3. To perform the currency conversion, key in the amount to be converted, pre ss Options and select In domestic or In foreign .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 123 You can also perform the currency conversion in standby mode. Key in the amount to be converted, press Options and select In domest ic or In foreign . Wallet In Wa lle t you can save personal information, such as credit card numbers and make purchases using your phone. You can access wallet via the Wa l le t menu or via t he WAP browser, see Options while browsing on page 139 . When you access the wallet for the first time, you ne ed to create your own wallet code. At Create wallet code: key in the code and press OK to confirm it and at V erify wallet code: key in the code again and press OK . If you want to delete all the contents of the wallet and the wall et code, key in *#7370925538# (or *#res0 wallet# in letters) in stan dby mode. You also need the phone â s security code, see also Access codes on page 14 . Saving and changi ng personal card inf ormation To access the wallet, press Menu , select Extras and Wal let . If required, key in your wallet code and press OK . Select Cards to view the list of cards and scroll to the desired card. The maximum number of cards is five. ⢠To save information on a card, press Options and select View . Select ⢠Card info to key in, for exam ple, the card holder â s name, card type, number and expiry information. ⢠User info to save the user name and password.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 124 ⢠Shipping info to save your contact information. ⢠Billing info to save the contact information in case the invoicing address differs from your own, for example with company credit cards. ⢠Receipt info to save phone numbers and e-mail addresses to which you want the service provider to send a receipt of y our purchase. ⢠To make a copy of the card, press Options and select Copy card . ⢠To delete all the informat ion on the card, press Option s and sele ct Clear card . ⢠To rename the card, press Options and select Rename card . Personal note s You can save up to 30 personal notes, for example passwords, codes or notations. Press Menu , select Extr as , Wa l le t and Personal notes . Press Options and you can view, add, edit a selected note and sort notes either by name or date. Send as te xt copies the note as a text message. Copy to calendar copies the note to the calendar as a memo. Use number extracts numbers from a note. Wallet settings Press Menu , select Extr as , Wa l le t and Settings . Select ⢠Code request to set the wallet code request to on or off. You need to key in the correct wallet code before you can set the code request to on or off. ⢠Change code to change the wallet code.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 125 Guidelines for paying for your purchases with wallet 1. Access the desired WAP site to do shoppings, se e Connecting t o a W AP service on page 138 , and choose the product you want to buy. 2. To pay for your purchases, press Options and select Use wall et info , see Options while browsing on page 139 . 3. Select the card with which you want to pay. Fill in the data form you receive from the service provider by transferring the credit card details from the wallet. If you want to fill in all the fields automatically, select Fill in all fields . The option is shown only when the WAP service supports the Electronic Commerce Modeling Language standard. You can also fill in the form by selecting information fields from the card one by one. The phone displays the completed form. 4. Approve the purchase and the information is forwarded. 5. You may receive a sign-in document from t he WAP service that you must sign in to make the purchase binding, see Digital signature on page 147 . 6. To clo se the wallet , select Close wallet . See Options while browsing on page 139 . Synchronisation You can save your calendar and contacts data on a re mote Internet server or on a compatible PC. If you have saved da ta on the remote Internet server, you can synchronise your phone by starting the synchronisation from your phone. You can also synchronise the data in your phone â s contact s and calendar to correspond with the data on your PC by starting the synchronisation from your PC.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 126 Note that answering an incoming call during synch ronisation will end the synchronisation process and you will need to start it again. Synchronisin g from your ph one Before synchronising from your phone, you may need to do the following: ⢠Subscribe to a synchronisation service. For more information on availability and the synchronisation service settings, contact your network operator or service provider. ⢠Obtain the synchronisation se ttings from your network operator or servi ce provider. You may receive the synchronisation settings as a text messa ge, see Saving the synchronisation settings received as a text message on page 127 or you may have to key in the sett ings manually, see Keying in the synchronisation se ttings manually on page 127 . To start the synchronisation from your phone: 1. Press Menu and select Services , Active service settings and select the connection setti ngs that you need for synchronisation. The synchronisation settings may differ fr om the service settings that are required for WAP browsing. After synchronising, change your Ac ti ve se r vi ce settings back to the previous ones if you want to use other WAP services later. 2. Mark the data that are going to be synchronised. See Data to b e synchr onised in Keying in the synchronisatio n settings manuall y on page 127 . 3. Press Menu and select Extras , Synchronisation and Synchronise .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 127 4. The marked data in the active set will be synchronised after confirmation. Note that synchronising for the first time may take time up to 30 minutes, if contacts or calendar are full. Saving the synchronisation settings received as a text message When you recei ve the synchron isation settings as a text message, Synchronisation settings received is displayed. Press Options and select Detail s to view the received settings first, Save to save the synchronisation settings, or Discard to discard them. Keying in the synchronisation settings manually Press Menu select Extr as , Synchronisation and Settings . Select Active Internet sync. sett ings . You need to activate the se t where you want to save the synchronisat ion settings. A set is a collection of se ttings required to make a connection to a service. Scroll to the set that you want to activate and press Activate . Select Edit active Interne t sync. settings . Select each setting one by one and key in all the required sett ings. ⢠Settings â name . Key in the name for the set and press OK . ⢠Data to be synchronised . Mark the data that you want to synchronise, Contacts and/or Calendar , and press Done . ⢠Database addresses . Select Contacts database and/or Calendar database to be edited. Key in the name of the database and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 128 ⢠User name . Key in the user name and press OK . ⢠P assword . Key in the password and press OK . ⢠Synchronisation server . Key in the name of the server and press OK . Synchronising from your PC To synchronise contacts and calendar from your PC, use either an IR connection or a data cable. You will also ne ed the PC Suite software of your phone installed on your PC. Start the synchronisation from your PC using PC suite. After synchronising, the data on the phone and on the PC are the same. Countdown timer Press Menu and select Extras an d Countdown timer . Key in the alarm time in hours and minutes and press OK . If you wish, write a text note which will be displayed when the time expires, and press OK to start the countdown timer. ⢠To change the countdown time, select Change time , or to stop the timer, select Stop timer . If the alarm time is reached when the phone is in standby mode, the phone sounds a tone and flashes the note text if it is set or el se Countdown time up . Stop the alarm by pressing any key. If no key is pressed, the alarm stops automatically within 30 seconds. To stop the alarm and to delete the te xt note, press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 129 Stopwatch You can measure time, record intermediate times or lap times using the stopwatch. During timing, the other functions of the phone can be used. To set the stopwatch to run in the background, press . Note: Using the stopwatch consumes the battery and the phon e â s operating time will be reduc ed. Be careful not to let it r un in the b ackground when pe rforming other operati ons with your ph one. Timing and split timing 1. Press Menu , select Extras , Stopwatch and Split timing . You can select Cont inue if you have set the stopwatch to run in the background. 2. Press Start to start timing. Press Split every time you want to record an intermediate time. The intermedi ate times are listed below the running time on the display. Scroll to view th e times. 3. Press Stop to stop timin g. 4. Press Options and select Start to start the timi ng again. The new time i s added to the previous one. Save to save the time. Key in a name for the measured time and press OK . If no name is keyed in, the total time is used as the title. Reset to reset the time without saving it.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 130 Lap timin g Press Menu , select Extr as , Stopwatch and Lap timing . Press Start to start timing and Lap to record a lap time. Press Stop to stop the lap timing. Press Option s and you can save or reset the lap t imes. Refer to Timing and split timing above. Viewing and deleting t imes Press Menu , select Extr as , and Stopwatch . If the stopwatch has not been reset, you can select Show last to view the most recent measured time. Select View times and a list of names or final times of the time sets is shown, select the t ime set that you want to view. To delete the saved ti mes, select Delete times . Select Delete all and press OK , or select One by one , scroll to the times th at you want to del ete, press Delete and press OK . â Connectivity (Menu 12) Infrared You can set up the ph one to receive data through i ts infrared (IR) port. To use an IR connection, the device with which you want to establish a connection must be IrDA compliant. You can send or receive data such as business cards and calendar notes to or from a compatible phone or data device (for example a computer) via the IR port of your phone. Do not poin t the IR (i nfrared ) beam at an yone â s eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 Laser product.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 131 Note: Y o u r p h o n e m u s t b e s w i t c h e d o n t o u s e t h i s f u n c t i o n . D o n o t s w i t c h t h e phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Sending and receiving data via IR ⢠Ensure that the IR ports of the sending and receiving devices are pointing at each other and that there are no obstructions between the devices. The preferable distance between the two devices in an infrared connection should be one meter at most. ⢠To activate the IR port of your phone to receive data via IR, press Menu and select Co nnectivity and Infrared . ⢠The user of the sending phone select s the desired IR function to start data transfer. If the data transfer is not started within two minutes after the activati on of the IR port, the connection is cancelled and has to be started again. IR connection indicator ⢠When is shown continuously, the IR connection is activated and your phone is ready to send or receive data via its IR port. ⢠When blinks, your phone is trying to connect to the other device or a connection has bee n lost. Note that the IR connection deactivates automatically.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 132 GPRS GPRS connecti on You can set the phone to automatically register to a G PRS network when you switch the phone on. Press Menu and select Connect ivity , GPRS , GPRS connection and Always online . When you start an appl ication using GPRS, the connection between the phone and the network is established, and data transfer is possible. When you end the application, the GPRS connection ends but the registration with the GPRS network remai ns. If you select When needed , the GPRS registration and connection are established when required by an application using GPRS and closed when you end the application. When the GPRS connection is established, the indicator is shown on the top left of the display. If you re ceive a call or a text message, or make a call during a GPRS connection, the indicator will be shown on the top right of the display to indicate that the GPRS connection has been suspe nded (on hold). GPRS modem sett ings You can connect the phone via an infrared or a data cable connection to a compatible PC and use the phone as a modem t o enable GPRS connectivity from the PC. Press Menu and select Connectivity , GPRS and GPRS modem settings . Select Active access point and activate the access point that you want to use. Select Edit active access point to change the access point sett ings.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 133 ⢠Scroll to Alias for access point and press Select . Key in the name that you would like for the activated access point and press OK . ⢠Scroll to GPRS access point and press Select . Key in the Access Point Name (APN) and press OK . An access point name is n eeded to establish a connection to a GPRS network. You can obtain the Access Point Name from your network operator or service provider. You can also set the GPRS dial-up service settings (Access Point Name) on your PC using the Nokia Modem Options software, see PC Suite on page 149 . If you have set the settings on both your PC and on your phone, note that the PC â s settings will be used. â WA P services (Menu 13) Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this func tion. Do not switch th e phone on when wireless phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause interferen ce or danger. You can access various WAP services such as banking, news, weather reports and entertainment. These servi ces are specially designed for mobile phones and they are maintained by WAP service providers. Check the availability of WAP services, pricing and tariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose service you wish to use. Se rvice providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 134 The WAP services use Wireless Mark-Up Language (WML) on their WAP pages. Internet web pages cannot be viewed on your phone. Basic steps fo r accessing and us ing WAP services 1. Save the service settin gs that are required to access t he WAP service that you want to use. See page 134 . 2. Make a connection to the given WAP service. See page 138 . 3. Start browsing the pages of the WAP servic e. See page 139 . 4. Once you are fini shed browsing, end the connection to the WAP service. See page 14 1 . Setting up the phone for a WAP service You may receive the service settings as a text message from the network operator or service provider that offers the WAP service that you want to use. For more information, contact your network operator or service provider, or visit Club Nokia â s website (www.club.nokia.com). You can also key in the settings manually or add and edit the settings using PC Suite. For the appropriate settings, contact your network operator or service provider. The WAP settings may be available, for ex ample, on their website. Saving the service settings received as a text message When you receive t he service settings as a tex t message, Service settings received is displayed.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 135 ⢠To save the received settings, press Options and select Save . If no settings are saved in Active service settings , the settings are saved in the first free connection set and are also activated. If there are settings save d in Active service settings , Activate saved service settings? will be displayed. To activate the saved settings, press Ye s , or to save them only, press No . ⢠To discard the received settings, press Options and sel ect Discard . ⢠To view the recei ved settings first, pr ess Options and select View . To save the settings, press Save . Keying in the service settings manually 1. Press Menu and select Services , Settings and Connection settings . 2. Select Active service setti ngs . You need to ac tivate the set where you want to save the se rvice settings. A set is a collection of settings required to make a connection to a WAP service. 3. Scroll to the set you wou ld like to activate and pre ss Activate . 4. Select Edi t active service settings . Select each of the sett ings one by one and key in all t he required settings. ⢠Setting â s name - Key in the new name for the connection set and press OK . ⢠Homepage - Key in the home page address of the WAP service that you want to use, press for a dot, and press OK . ⢠Session mode - Select Pe r m a n e n t or Temporary .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 136 ⢠Connection security - Select On or Off . When the connect ion security is On , the phone tries to use a secure connection with the WAP service. If a secure connection is not available, the connection will not be made. If you wish to connect anyway, with a non-secure connection, you must set t he connection security to Off . ⢠Data bearer - Select GMS data or GPRS . ⢠Bearer settings - Settings for th e selected bearer , see Settings when GSM data is the selected data bearer and Settings when GPRS is the selected data bearer below. For pricing, connection speed and other information, contact your network operator or service provider. Settings when GSM data is the selected data bearer ⢠Dial-up number - Key in the phone number and press OK . ⢠IP address - Key in the address, press for a dot, and press OK . You obtain the IP address from your network operator or service provider. ⢠Authentication type - Select Secure or Normal . ⢠Data call type - Select Analogue or ISDN . ⢠Data call speed - Select the speed you want to use, or select Automatic . Automatic is av ailable only if t he current selected data call type is Analogue . The actual data call speed depends on the service provider. ⢠Login type - Select Manual or Auto matic .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 137 ⢠User name - Key in the user name and press OK . ⢠P assword - Key in the password and press OK . ⢠Display terminal window - Select Ye s , if you want the server to perform user authentication when you access intranet sites during a dial-up connection. Settings when GPRS is the selected data bearer ⢠GPRS access point - Key in the access point name and press OK . An access point name is n eeded to establish a connection to a GPRS network. You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. ⢠IP address - Key in the address, press for a dot, and press OK . You obtain the IP address from your network operator or service provider. ⢠Authentication type - Select Secure or Normal . ⢠Login type - Select Manual or Auto matic . If you select Automatic , the login type uses the user name and password keyed in the following settings. If you select Manual , the login information is required each time when establi shing a connection. ⢠User name - Key in the user name and press OK . ⢠P assword - Key in the password and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 138 Connecting to a WAP service Firstly, make sure that the service sett ings of the WAP service that you want to use have been activate d. To activate the settin gs: ⢠Press Menu and select Services , Settings and Connection settings . Select Active service settings and scroll to the set you want to activate and press Activate . Secondly, make a connection to the WAP service. T here are three ways to connect: ⢠Open the homepage of the WAP service: Press Menu and select Services an d Home . Tip: To quickly open the home page of a WAP service when the flip is closed, press and hold in standby mode. When the flip is open, press the corresponding number key. Or: ⢠Select a bookmark of the WAP service: Press Menu and select Services , Bookmarks , and select a bookmar k. If the bookmark does not work with the current active service sett ings, activate another set of service settings and try again. Or: ⢠Key in the address of the WAP service: Press Menu and select Services and then Go to address . Key in the address of the WAP service, press for special characters (or if the flip is open), and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 139 Note that it is not n ecessary to add the prefix http:/ / in front of the address since it will be added automatically. Browsing the pages of a WAP service After you have made a connection to the WAP service, you can start browsing its WAP pages. The function of the phone keys may vary in different WAP services. Follow the text guides on the phone display. For more information, contact your WAP service provider. Note that if GPRS is selected as the data bearer, the indicator is shown on the top left of the display during browsing. If you receive a call or a tex t message, or make a call during a GPRS connection, the indicator will be shown on the top right of the display to indicate that the GPRS connect ion has been suspended (on hold). Using the phone keys while browsing ⢠Move the joystick up or down to browse through the WAP page. ⢠To select a highlighted item, press . ⢠To enter letters and n umbers, press the keys - and to enter special characters, press the key . When t he flip of your phone is open, you can key in letters and numbers normally. Options while b rowsing Press Options and select one of the options available. The service provider may also offer other options. Select
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 140 ⢠Home to return to the homepage of the WAP service. ⢠Bookmarks . See page 142 . ⢠Call , Edit , Open row , Ope n , Open list to call, to key in text or to select a highlighted item on the WAP page. ⢠Add bookmark to save the WAP page as a bookmark. ⢠View image or View images to view images and animations from the WAP page. ⢠Go to address to key in the address of the WAP service you want t o access. ⢠Service inbox . See page 143 . ⢠Use wallet info and Close wallet . See Guidelines for paying for your purchases with wallet on page 125 . ⢠Appear . settings . See Appearance settings of the WAP browser on page 14 1 . ⢠Cookies . See page 147 . ⢠Use detail to copy a number from t he WAP page for saving or making a call. If the WAP page contains several numbers, you can select the desired one. ⢠Reload to reload and update the current WAP page. ⢠Clear the cache . See The cache memory on page 14 4 . ⢠Security info to view security information about t he current WAP connection and the server. ⢠Quit . See Ending a WAP connection on page 14 1 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 141 Direct calling The WAP browser supports functions that you can access while browsing. You can make a voice call, send DTMF tones while a voice call is in progress, and save a name and a phone number from a WAP page in cont acts. Ending a WAP connecti on To quit browsing and to end the connection, press Options and select Quit . When Quit browsing? is shown, press Ye s . Alternatively, press . If GSM data is the select ed data bearer, press twice. The phone ends the connection to the WAP service. Appearance se ttings of th e WAP browser 1. While browsing, press Options and select Appear . sett ings , or in standby mode, press Menu and select Services , Settings and Appearance settings . 2. Select Text wrapping or Show images . 3. Select On or Off for Text wrapping and Ye s or No for Show images . When Text wrapping is set to On , the text contin ues on the nex t line if it cannot be shown on one line. If you select Off , th e text is abbrev iated, if it is too long to be shown on one line. When Show images is set to No , any pictures appearing on the WAP page are not shown. This can speed up t he browsing of WAP pages that contain a lot of pictures.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 142 Bookmarks You can save WAP addresses as bookmarks in the phone â s memory. 1. While browsing, press Options and select Bookmarks , or in standby mode, press Menu and select Services an d Bookmarks . 2. Scroll to the bookmark you want to use and press Opti ons . 3. Select one of the following options: Go to to make a connection to the WAP page associated with the bookmark. View , Ed it or De lete to view, modify or delete the selected bookmark. Send to send the selected bookmark directly to another phone, select As bookmark , or to send the bookmark as a text me ssage, select As text message . New bookmark to create a new bookmark without connecting to the WAP service. Key in the address and the title of the WAP page and press OK . Note that your phone may have some pre-installed bookmarks for sites that are not affiliated to Nokia. Nokia does not guarantee or endorse these sit es. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions for security and content as you would with any Internet site. Receiving a bookmark When you have received a bookmark, 1 bookmark received is displayed. Press View , then press Opti ons and select View to view the bookmark, Sav e to save the bookmark, or Discard to discard it.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 143 Service inbox The phone is abl e to receive service me ssages (pushed messages) sent by you r service provider. Service messages are notifications of, for example news headlines, and they may contain a text message or an address of a WAP service. To access the Service inbox in standby mode, when you have received a service message, press View . ⢠If you press Exit the message is move d to the Service inbox . To access the Service inbox later, press Menu and select Services and Service inbox . To access the Service inbox while browsing, press Options and select Service inbox . Scroll to the message you want, press Options and sele ct ⢠Retrieve to activate the WML browser and download the marked content. ⢠Details to display detailed information on the service notification. ⢠Delete to delet e the selected service noti fication. Setting the phone to receive service messages Press Menu and select Services , Settings , Service inbox settings , and Service messages . To set the phone to receive service messages,select On . If you select Off , the phone will not receive service messages.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 144 The cache memory Note: The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache of your phone . A cache is a buffe r memory, which is used to stor e data temp oraril y. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, your ba nk account), empty the cache of your phone after each u se. To empty the cache, ⢠while browsing, press Options and select Clear the cache , o r ⢠in standby mode, press Menu and select Services and Clear th e cache . Browser secu rity settings Security features are required for some WAP services, such as banking services or shopping on a WAP site. For such connections you need security certificates and possibly a security module, which may be available on your SIM card. For more information, contact your service provider. Security modu le The security module can contain certificates as well as private and public keys. The security module provides security services for WAP-related applications, and allows you to use a digital signatu re. The certificates are saved in the security module by the service provider, or they can be downloaded from a WAP site. Press Menu and select Services , Settings and Security module settings . Select ⢠Security module details to show the security module tit le, its status, manufacturer and serial number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 145 ⢠Module PIN request to set the phone to ask for t he module PIN when using services provided by the security module. Key in the code and select On . To disable the module PIN request, select Off . ⢠Change module PIN to change the module PIN, if allowed by the security module. Key in the current module PIN code, then key in the new code twice. ⢠Change signing PIN to view a list of signing PINs. Select the signing PIN that you want to change. Key in the current PIN code, then key in the new code twice. See also Access codes on page 14 . Certificat es There are three kinds of certificates: server certificate s, authority certificates and user certificates. ⢠Server certificates The phone uses a server certificate to cre ate a secure connection to the WAP service provider. The phone receives the server certificate from the service provider before the connection is established and its validity is checked using the authority certificates saved in the phone. Serve r certificates are not saved. The phone indicates whethere the identity of the WAP server or WAP gateway can be verified, whether the WAP server or WAP gateway certificate is authentic, and whether you have the corre ct authority certificate on your phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 146 The security indicator is displayed during a WAP connection, if the data transmission between the phone and the WAP gateway or WAP server (identified by the IP addre ss in the Edit active service set tings ) is encrypted. However, the security i ndicator is not an indicati on that the data transmission between the gateway and the content server (place where the requested resource is saved) is secure. It is up to the service provider to secure the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. ⢠Authority certificates For using some WAP services, such as banking services, and for checking the validity of other certificates, you need an autho rity certificate. You can download the certificate from a WAP site, if the WAP service supports the use of authority certificates. If you save the certificate, it is added to the certificate list in the phone. Authority certificates may also be available in the security module. ⢠User certificates User certificates are issu ed to users by a Certifying A uthority. User certificates are required, for example, to create a digital signature and they associate the user with a specific private key in a security module. User certificates are saved in the security module by the service provider, or you can download them to your phone from a WAP site, if supported by the security module of the SIM card.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 147 Digital si gnature You can create digital signatures with your phone. The signature can be traced back to you via the private keyin the security module and the user certificate that was used to create the signature. Using the digital signature may be considered to be equal to a normal signature on any legal document. To create a digital signature, select a link on a WAP page, for example the title of the book you want to buy and its price. The text t hat needs to be signed (possibly including amount, date, etc.) will be shown. Check that the h eader text is Re ad and that the digital signature icon is shown. Note: If the digital signature icon does not appear, there is a security breach, and you should not enter any personal data such as your signing PIN. To add the digital signature text, read all of the text first and then select Sign . Note: The text may not fit within a single screen. Therefore, make sure to scroll through and read all of the text before signing. Select the user certi ficate you want to use. Ke y in the signing PIN (see Access codes on page 14 ) and press OK . The digital signature icon will disappear and the WAP service may display a confirmation of your purchase. Cookies You can set the phone to allow or prevent the receiving of cookies.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 148 A cookie is data that a WAP site saves in your phone â s browser cache memory. The data can be, for example, your user information or your browsing preferences. Cookies will be saved until you clear the cache memory, see The cache memory on page 144 . 1. While browsing, press Options and select Cookies, or in standby mode, press Menu an d select Services , Settings and Security settings . 2. Select Cookie s and select Allo w or Reject to allow or prevent the phone receiving cookies. â SIM services (Menu 14) In addition to the functions that are available on the phone, your SIM card may provide additional services that you can access in Menu 14. Menu 14 is only shown if it is supported by your SIM card. The name and contents of the menu depend entirely on the service available. Note: For availability, rates and infor mation on using SIM service s, contact your SIM card vend or, e.g. network o perator, service prov ider or other vend or. You can set the phone to show you the confirmation messages that are sent between your phone and the network when you are using the SIM services by selecting the option Yes in Phone settings , Confirm SIM service actions . Note that accessing these services may involve sending a text message (SMS) or making a phone call for which you may be charged.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 149 8. PC Connectivity You can access the Internet when your phone is connected to a compatible PC via an IR connection or a data cable. You can use your phone with a variety of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With PC Suite you can, for example send text and picture messages, synchronise contacts, cale ndar, to-do notes and notes between your phone and the PC, and manage your WAP bookmarks and connection settings. You can find more information and downloadable files on the Nokia website, www.nokia. com/support/phones/6800. â PC Suite The PC Suite contain s the following applicati ons : ⢠Nokia Application Installer to install Java applications from the PC to the phone. ⢠Nokia Image Converter to modify images as pictures for multimedia messages, wallpapers or operator logos and to transfer them to your phone. ⢠Nokia Sound Converter to modify polyphonic ringing tones to make them compatible with your phone and transfer them t o your phone. ⢠Nokia Content Copier to copy data or back-up data from your phone to your PC or to another Nokia phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 150 ⢠Nokia PC WAP M anager to edit and send your WAP bookmarks or update the connection sets on your phone. ⢠Nokia Phone Editor to send text messages (SMS) and edit contacts, and message settings of your phone. ⢠Nokia Phone Browser to browse and modify picture and audio files in the phone â s memory and to transfer them betwee n phone and PC. ⢠Nokia PC Sync to synchronise contacts, calendar and to-do notes between your phone and your PC. ⢠Nokia 6800 data modem drivers enable you to use your phone as a modem. ⢠Nokia Modem Options contains settings for HSCSD a nd GPRS connections. ⢠Nokia Connection Manager to select the connection type between the PC and the phone. GPRS, HSCSD and CSD You can use GPRS (General Packet Radio Service), HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data) and CSD (Circuit Switched Data, GSM data) da ta services. For availability and subscription to high-speed data services, contact your network operator or service provider. Note that the use of HSCSD service consumes th e phone â s battery faster than normal voice or data calls. You may need to connect the phone to a charger for the duration of data transfer. See GPRS modem sett ings on page 132 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 151 â Using data communications ap plications For information on using a data communications application, refer to the documentation provided with it. 1. If you use an IR connect ion: ⢠Activate the IR connect ion in the phone, see Infrared on page 130 . Make sure that the conn ection is active on your PC. If you use the cable DKU-5: ⢠Connect the cable to t he USB port on your computer and to the connector on your phone. 2. Start using the data communications application on the compute r. Note that making or answering phone calls during a computer connection is not recommended as it might disrupt the operation. For a better performance during data calls, place the phone on a stationary surface with the keypad facing downward. Do not move the phone or hold it in your hand during a da ta call.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 152 9. Battery information â Charging and Discharg ing Your phone is po wered by a rech argeable batt ery. Note that a new battery â s full performance is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cy cles! The battery can be cha rged and discharge d hundreds of times bu t it will eventually wear out. When the operating time (talk-time and standby time) is noticeably shorter th an normal, it is time to buy a new battery. Use only batteries ap proved by the ph one manufacturer an d recharge your ba ttery only with the chargers approved by the manufactu rer. Unplug the charger when not i n use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger for longer than a week, since overcharging may shorten its lifetim e. If left unused a f ully charged bat tery will discharge itself o ver time. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery t o charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery w hich is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, cl ip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - t erminals of th e battery (metal strips on the battery) for example wh en you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-ci rcuiting the te rminals may dama ge the battery or the connectin g object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15 ð C and 25 ð C (59 ð F and 77 ð F). A phon e with a ho t or cold bat tery may
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 153 temporarily not work, even when the battery is fully charged. Batteries â performanc e is particularly lim ited in tempera tures well below f reezing. Do not di spose of b atteries in a fire ! Dispose of batteries ac cording to local regulations (e.g . recycling). Do n ot dispose as household waste.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 154 CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your phone is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfil any warranty obligat ions and to enjoy this product for m any years. ⢠Keep the ph one and all its pa rts and accessories out of the reach of small children . ⢠Keep the phone dry. Precipitat ion, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can conta in minera ls that w ill corr ode elec tronic circuits . ⢠Do not use or store the phone in dusty, dirty areas. Its m oving parts can be da maged. ⢠Do not store the pho ne in hot areas. High tem peratures can shorten the life of electroni c devices, damage batt eries, and warp or melt certain plastic s. ⢠Do not store the phone in cold areas. When it wa rms up (to its normal temp erature), moisture can form insi de, which may d amage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open th e phone. Non-expert handling may damage it. ⢠Do not drop, knock or shake t he phone. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cl eaning solvents, or strong dete rgents to clean the phone. ⢠Do not paint the phone. Paint ca n clog the m oving parts and p revent proper opera tion. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approv ed replacement antenna. Unaut horised antennas, modifications or attachments cou ld damage the ph one and may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggestion s apply equally to your ph one, battery, charger or any accessory. If any of them is not working properly, take it to your nearest qualif ied service fa cility. The personnel there w ill assist yo u and, if necessary, ar range for se rvice.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 155 IMPORT ANT SAFETY INFORMA TION â Traffic Safety Do not use a h and-held telephone while driving a vehicle. Always secure the ph one in its holder; do not plac e the phone on the passeng er seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Remembe r road safety always comes f i rst ! â Operating environment Remember to f ollow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your phone whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cau se interference or dange r. Use the phone o nly in its norma l operating positions. Parts of the p hone are magnet ic. Metallic material s may be attr acted to the ph one, and persons with a hearing aid sho uld not hold the phon e to the ear with the hearing aid. Always secure the phone i n its holder, because metallic materi als may be attracted by the earpiece. Do not plac e credit cards or ot her magnetic storage media near the phone, because information stored on them may be erased. â Electronic devices Most modern electroni c equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipm ent may not b e shielded against the RF sig nals from your wireless phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 156 Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recomme nd that a minimum separation of 20 cm (6 inch es) be maintained b etween a hand held wireless phone an d a pacemaker to avoid potent ial interference with the pacemaker. These recommen dations are consistent with the indep endent re search by and rec ommendat ions of Wireles s Techn ology Res earch. Persons with pacemakers: ⢠Should always keep the phone more than 20 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when the phone is sw itched on; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a brea st pocket; ⢠Should use th e ear opposite the pacemak er to minimise the potential for interference. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your phone immediately. Hearing aids Some digital wireless phone s may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you m ay want to consul t your service provider . Other medical devices Operation of any radio tran smitting equi pment, including cellular phones, may interfere with the functional ity of inadequately p rotected medical devices. Consu lt a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequ ately shielded from external RF energy or if you have an y questions. Switch off your phone in health ca re facilities when any regulatio ns posted in these ar eas instruct you to do so. Hosp itals or health care facilities ma y be using equip ment that cou ld be sensitive to external RF energy.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 157 Vehicle s RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shie lded electronic systems in motor vehicles (e.g . electronic fuel injection systems, electron ic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air-bag systems). Check with the manuf acturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer o f any equipment that has be en added to your vehicle. Posted facilities Switch your phone off in any facility where posted notices so r equire. â Potentiall y explosive at mospheres Switch off your phone when in any area with a pot entially explosive atmosphere an d obey all signs and instructions. Spa rks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch off the ph one when at a refuelling point (service station). U sers are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio eq uipment in fuel dep ots (fuel storage an d distribution a reas), chemical plant s or where blastin g operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atm osphere are often but not always clearly marke d. They include below d eck on boats; ch emical transfer or storage facilities; ve hicles using liquified petroleum gas (such a s propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as gra in, dust or metal p owders; and any ot her area where you would normally be ad vised to turn off your vehicle engine.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 158 â Vehicles Only qualified personnel should se rvice the phon e, or install the phone in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dan gerous and may in validate any warr anty which may a pply to the uni t. Check regularly that all wireless phone equ ipment in your vehicle is mounted and operat ing properly. Do not store or carr y flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment a s the phone, it s parts or acce ssories. For vehicles equipp ed with an air bag, remem ber that an air bag inflat es with great force. Do not place obje cts, including both installed o r portable wire less equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployme nt area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is impro perly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury c ould result. Using your p hone while in th e air is prohibit ed. Switch off yo ur phone befor e boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teleph ones in an air craft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless tel ephone network and may be illegal. Failure to ob serve these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of teleph one services to the offe nder, or legal a ction or bot h. â Emergency calls Importan t: This phone, like any w ireless phone, oper ates using radio signals, wireless and landli ne networks as well as user-programmed fu nctions. Because of this, connection s in all conditions can not be guaranteed. Therefo re, you should never rely solely upon any wireless phone for essential commun ications (e.g. medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all w ireless phone networks or when certain network services and/or phone fea tures are in use. Check with local service providers.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 159 To make an emergency call: 1. If th e phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal stren gth. Some networks may require th at a valid SIM card is properl y inserted in t he phone. 2. Press as many times a s needed (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu , etc.) to clear the display and ready t he phone for calls. 3. Key in the emergency numb er for your present l ocation (e.g. 112 or o ther official emergency number). Eme rgency numbers vary by loca tion. 4. Press the key If certain features a re in use, you may first need to turn those feat ures off before you can make an emergency call. Consult th is guide and you r local cellular service p rovider. When making an emergenc y call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Rem ember that your wireless pho ne may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given permission to do so. â Certification information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEE TS THE EU REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES . Your mobile phone is a radio transm itter and receiver. It is designed and manufac tured not to exceed the lim its for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy recommended by The Council of th e European Unio n. These limits are p art of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitt ed levels of RF energ y for the gener al population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organisations through perio dic and thorough evaluation of scien tific studies. The lim its include a su bstantial safety marg in designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones emp loys a unit of measurement known as the Speci fic Abs orptio n Rate, or SAR. The SAR li mit re commen ded by Th e Counci l of the
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 160 European Union is 2.0 W/kg.* Tests for SAR have been conducted using standard op erating positions with th e phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. A lthough the SA R is determined a t the highest certifie d power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while oper ating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the pho ne is designed to oper ate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station antenna, th e lower the p ower outp ut. Before a phone model is availabl e for sale to th e public, compliance with the Euro pean R&TTE directive m ust be shown. This di rective includes as one essential requireme nt the protection o f the health a nd the safety for the user a nd any other per son. The highest SAR value for this mod el phone when te sted for complianc e against the standar d was 0.62 W/kg. While there may b e differences b etween the SAR levels of various phones and at var ious positions, they all meet the EU requirements for RF exposure. * The SAR limit for mob ile phones used by th e public is 2.0 w atts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of tissue. The limit incorp orates a substantial margin of safety to give additional pro tection for the public an d to account for any variat ions in measurements . SAR values may vary depending on nationa l reporting requir ements and the net work band. For SAR informatio n in other regions please look under product information at www .nokia.com.
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 161 INDEX A accented characters 45 access codes. See also PIN code, PIN2 code, PUK code, PUK2 code, security code accessories settings 103 alarm clock 106 B background picture. See wallpaper backspace key 22, 45 battery charging 31 installing/rem oving 28 bookmarks saving for WAP services 142 brightness adjustin g display 102 browser security security module for WAP applications 144 business card receiving 55 sending 55 C calculator 121 converting currency 122 calendar 107 making a note 108 synchronising 126 call barring 104 password 15 call lists. See call regi ster call register dialled numbers 90 erasing call lists 91 missed calls 90 received calls 90 call settings activating call divert/ forwarding 95 answering a call with any key 96 call waiting 97
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 162 own number display 97 redialli ng, au tomatic 96 selecting a phone line 97 setting call symmary after a call 97 speed dialling 96 caller groups adding a contact 57 naming a group 57 removing a contact 57 selecting a ringi ng tone 57 setting the group logo 57 calling. Se e calls calls activating call waiting 97 answering 41 cost settings 91 dialled numbers 91 diverting 95 erasing call li sts 91 forwarding 95 functions during a call 42 making a call 38 making a conference call 40 missed calls 90 received calls 90 redialling th e last number 38 rejecting 41 setting automatic redial 9 6 to the voice mailbox 39 using speed dialling 39, 96 viewing costs 91 viewing duration 91 character key (Chr) 23, 45 charging battery 31 chat messages 84 clock 94 conference call 40 connection activati ng the phone to register automatically to GPRS network 132 connecting to a WAP site 138 connecting to PC via IR/ cable 151 sending/receiving data via GPRS 132
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 163 sending/receiv ing data vi a IR 131 contacts adding/saving names and phone numbers 51 arranging contacts to caller groups 57 checking the memory in use/status 5 0, 51 copying names and numbers from SIM/phone memory 54 editing names/numbers 53 erasing names/numbers 54 receiving names/numbers as a business card 55 saving mult iple numbers/ text items per name 51 searching a name 53 sending names/numbers as a business card 55 speed dialling 39 synchronising 126 viewing own numbers 57 costs call costs 91 countdown timer 128 counters checking data size in bytes 92 currency converting 122 D date 95 digital signature 147 display settings adjusting brightne ss 102 changing indicator/ header colours 101 operator logo 101 screen saver 102 wallpaper 100 distribution list (for text messages) 73 E e-mail. See messages enter key 22 F factory settings resetting menu settings to original values 105
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 164 flip activating the l oudspeaker 42 opening 33 opening to un lock the keypad lock 36 folders adding new 72 archiving messages 72, 81 deleted items 81 deleting 78 deleting all messages from a folder 78 drafts 81 for e-mails 81 for multimedia messages 77 in the Gallery menu 114 inbox e-mails 81 multimedia messages 77 text messages 71 outbox e-mails 81 multimedia messages 77 text messages 71 saved items for sending multimedia messages later 77 sent items 81 font size selecting 90 G gallery (the Gallery menu) 114 folders 114 presaved pictures 100 General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) activati ng the automat ic register to GPRS network 132 as data bearer in WAP 137 checking data size in bytes 92 modem settings for PC 132 H headset. See accessories I idle mode. See standby mode infrared (IR). See also connection
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 165 sending and receiving data via IR 131 installing battery 28 SIM card 28 J Java (the Applica tions menu) 120 checking the memory 121 downloading a pplications 120 starting an applica tion 119 K keyboard keys 22 light key 22 switching on or off 36 writing text 44 keyguard. See keypad lock keypad lock locking/unlocking 36 using the security code 98 keys in browsing the WAP pages 139 joystick 21 left and right sele ction key 20 of the messaging keyboard 22 power key 20, 23, 31 profile key 22 speed dialling 39 volume keys 20 when flip closed 20, 21 when flip open 22, 23, 31 backspace key 22 character key 23 enter key 22 keyboard lights 22 shift keys 23 space bars 23 L language selecting from phone settings 98 last number redial 38 loopset. See accessories loudspeaker activating/deactivating 42
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 166 adjustin g volume 20 connecting a carkit/ headset 42 M memory checking GPRS data size 92 checking status 50, 51 checking the memory available for Java applications 121 copying names and numbers to SIM /phone 54 of the phone 50, 51 of the SIM card 50, 51 shared 19 menu accessing by scrolling 58 shortcut 58 list of functions 60 using the menu 58 messages concatenated 68 deleting all fol ders 78 deleting all from a folde r 78 deleting text messages 70 e-mail downloading from your account 80 reading 80 replying 81 writing/sendi ng info messages 86 multimedia deleting/forwarding 76 editing 76 reading/replying 76 selecting an ima ge from the Gallery folder 74 writing/sendi ng 74 organising into folders 72 picture messages 68 reading text messages 70 replying to text messages 70 selecting the font size 90 sending text messages using distribution lists 73 starting/sending chat messages 84 writing with predictive
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 167 text input 4 6 writing with the keyboard 44 writing with traditional text input 4 7 writing/sendin g text messages 69 module PIN 15 multimedia messages. See messages N network selecting manuall y/ automatically 99 network services automatic update of date and time 95 barring a call 104 call costs 91 call summary 97 call waiting 9 7 concatenated messages 68 diverting/forwarding a call 95 info messages 86 line for outgoing calls 97 missed calls own number display 97 received calls restricting calls to a limited user group 105 voice mailbox 85 notepad writing a calen dar note 108 O operator logo 101 outgoing messages outbox 77, 81 P PC suite applications 149 connecting to PC via IR/ cable 151 phone settings selecting a lang uage 98 selecting network manually/ automatically 99 setting welcome note 99 picture messages 68 PIN code 14, 104 power key 20, 23, 31
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 168 predictive text input setting on or off 46 writing compound words 47 profile key 22 profiles activating 93 personalising 93 PUK and PUK2 codes 14 R radio listening through a loudspeaker 114 saving/deleti ng a channel 113 setting the frequency 113 tuning a cha nnel 112 tuning, automatic 1 13 tuning, manu al 113 received messages inbox 71, 77, 81 S safety instructions 11 screen saver 102 security code 14 changing 105 locking the keys 98 security keyguard. See keypad lock security settings 15 call barring password 15 digital signature 147 module PIN 15 PIN code 14, 104 PUK code 14 PUK2 code 14 restricting calls to a limited user group 105 restricting incoming/ outgoing calls 104 security code 14 signing PIN (for security module in SIM) 15 wallet code 15, 123 selection key 20 services, additional SIM 148 shared memory 19 shift keys 23, 44 signing PIN (for security module in SIM) 15
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 169 SIM card copying memory 54 installing 28 SMS messages. See messages space bars 23 speed dialling assigning a phone number 56 calling 39 setting 96 standby mode 23 changing indicator colours 101 display indicators in 23, 24 operator logo 101 screen saver 102 wallpaper 24 stopwatch lap timing 130 split timing 129 timing 129 switching on or off 22 keyboard lights 36 power 20 switching off with profile key 31 when flip closed 20 synchronise data in contacts/ calendar 126 starting from PC 128 starting from phone 126 T text messages. See messages time settings clock 94 date 95 setting the alarm 106 updating date and time automatically 95 to-do list making a note 109 organising notes by priority/date 109 tones adjusting volu me 102 ringing tone types 102 selecting a tone for a caller group 57
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 170 setting all by selecting a profile 93 setting an alert for a certain caller group 102 V voice mailbox 39 listening t o messages 85 mailbox number 85 messages 85 volume using volume keys 20 W wallet creating wallet code 123 paying purchases 125 signing documents via WAP 147 wallet code 15, 1 23 wallpaper 24, 1 00 activating/dea ctivating 101 selecting a picture 100 WAP servi ces connecting to a WAP sit e 138 downloading wallpaper pictures 100 saving bookmarks 142 security module in SIM 144 service settings GPRS data bearer 137 GSM data bearer 136 receiving as SMS message 134 signing documents 147 using the keys in browsing 139 welcome note 99 writing accented characters 45 changing character case 44 deleting/correctingtext 22, 45 e-mail messages multimedia message s 74 special characters 23, 45 symbols 44 text messages 69 tips fo r wri ting 48 upper and lower case
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 171 letters 23, 44 using the keyboad 44 with p redic tive t ext i nput 46 with tradition al text input 47
This limited warranty shall apply in part of Nokia Mobile Phonesâ Europe & Africa Region unless a local warranty exists. Nokia Corporation, Nokia Mobile Phones (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) warrants that this NOKIA product (âÂÂProductâÂÂ) is at the time of its original purchase free of defects in materials, design and workmanship subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. This limited warranty is given to the end-purchaser of the Product (âÂÂCustomerâÂÂ). It shall neither exclude nor limit i) any mandatory statutory rights of the Customer or ii) any of the CustomerâÂÂs rights against the seller/dealer of the Product. 2. The warranty period is twelve (12) months from the date on which the first Customer purchased the Product. In case of a subsequent purchase or other change of owner/user, such warranty period shall continue for the remaining part of the twelve (12) month period and otherwise remain unaffected. This limited warranty is only valid and enforceable in the following countries: Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, the Czech Republic, Estonia, any member state of the European Union, Hungary, Iceland, Israel, Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, Malta, Norway, Poland, Romania, the Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Switzerland and Turkey. 3. During the warranty period Nokia or its authorized service company will repair or replace, at NokiaâÂÂs sole discretion, a defective Product. Nokia will return the repaired Product or another Product to the Customer in good working condition. All parts or other equipment for which replacements have been provided shall become the property of Nokia. 4. A repaired or replaced Product will not be given a prolonged or renewed warranty period. 5. This limited warranty will not cover painted covers or other similar personalized parts. In all cases that require unlocking or locking of an operator SIM- lock, Nokia will first direct the Customer to such operator for unlocking or locking of the operator SIM-lock before repairing or replacing the Product. 6. This limited warranty shall not apply to deterioration due to normal wear and tear. This limited warranty shall further not apply if: (i) the defect was caused by the fact that the Product has been subjected to: use in contradiction with the ownerâÂÂs/user manual, rough handling, exposure to moisture, dampness or extreme thermal or environmental conditions or rapid changes in such conditions, corrosion, oxidation, unauthorized modifications or connections, unauthorized opening or repair, repair by use of unauthorized spare parts, misuse, improper installation, accident, forces of nature, spillage of food or liquid, influence from chemical products or other acts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia (including but not limited to deficiencies in consumable parts, such as batteries which all by their nature have a limited lifetime, and breakage or damage to antennas) unless the defect was caused directly by defects in materials, design or workmanship; (ii) Nokia or its authorized service company was not notified by the Customer of the defect within thirty (30) days after the appearance of the defect within the warranty period; (iii) the Product was not returned to Nokia or its authorized service company within thirty (30) days after the appearance of the defect within the warranty period; (iv) the Product serial number, the accessory date code or the IMEI number has been removed, erased, defaced, altered or is illegible; (v) the defect was caused by a defective function of the cellular network; (vi) the defect was caused by the fact that the Product was used with or connected to an accessory not manufactured and supplied by Nokia or used in other than its intended use; (vii) the defect was caused by the fact that the battery was short-circuited or seals of the battery enclosure or cells were broken or show evidence of tampering or the battery was used in equipment other than for which it has been specified; or (viii) the Product software needs to be upgraded due to changes in cellular network parameters. 7. To claim this limited warranty the Customer shall present either i) a legible and non-modified original warranty card which clearly indicates the name and address of the seller, the date and place of purchase, the product type and the IMEI or other serial number or alternatively ii) a legible and non-modified original purchase receipt which contains the same information, if such purchase receipt is presented to the seller/dealer of the Product. 8. This limited warranty is the CustomerâÂÂs sole and exclusive remedy against Nokia and NokiaâÂÂs sole and exclusive liability against the Customer for defects or malfunctions of the Product. This limited warranty replaces all other warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written, (non-mandatory) statutory, contractual, in tort or otherwise. Nokia is in no event liable for any incidental, consequential or indirect damage, costs or expenses. Neither is Nokia in any event liable for any direct damage, costs or expenses, if the Customer is a legal person. 9. Any change or amendment to this limited warranty requires NokiaâÂÂs prior written consent. LIMITED MANUFACTURERâÂÂS WARRANTY PART OF EUROPE & AFRICA REGION 9359974/02 3310_en.qxd 12.12.2001 12:35 Page 1
FILL IN WITH BLOCK LETTERS PurchaserâÂÂs Name: _____________________________________________________ Address: _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ Country: _____________________________________________________________ Phone: ______________________________________________________________ Date of Purchase (dd/mm/yy): Product Type (on phone type label under battery): Product Model (on phone type label under battery): Phone Serial No (on phone type label under battery): Place of Purchase: _____________________________________________________ Store Name: __________________________________________________________ Store Address: ________________________________________________________ W ARRANTY CARD Stamp // // / â 3310_en.qxd 12.12.2001 12:35 Page 2
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATION declare under our sole responsibility that the product NHL-6 is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/declaration_of_conformity/. Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribu tion or storage of part or all of the contents in this docum ent in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is proh ibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People and Pop-Port are trademarks or registered t rademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be t rademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. US Patent No 5818437 a nd other pending patent s. T9 text input softwa re Copyright (C) 1997-2003. T egic Communications, Inc. All right s reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products descr ibed in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible for any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequential or indirect damages howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided "as is". Except as required by applicable law, no warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. Nokia reserves the right to revise this document or withdraw it at any time without prior noti ce. The availability of particular products may vary by region. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest to you. Please dispose of batteries properly.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 3 Contents FOR YOUR SAFE TY ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......11 Access codes ........ .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....14 Overview of the phone functions ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ........16 Messaging conc ept .............................................................................................................. ..................... 16 Multimedia messaging service (MMS) ............................................................................................. ... 16 Polyphonic sound (MIDI) ........................................................................................................ ................. 16 General Packet Radio Service (G PRS) ............................................................................................ ...... 17 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................................................ 18 MIDP JavaTM applicati ons ... .................................................................................................... ............... 18 Stereo radio ...................................................................................... ............................. .............................. 18 Over the Air (OTA ) settings service ............................................................................................ ........... 18 Shared memory .................................................................................................................. ........................ 19 1. Your pho ne.............. ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......20 Keys (flip closed) ..................... ........................................................................................ ........................... 2 0 Connectors ..................................................................................................................... ........... ................... 2 1 Keys (flip open) ............................................................................................................... ............................ 2 2 Standby mode ................................................................................................................... .......................... 23 Screen saver ................................................................................................................... .......................... 24 Wallpaper ................................................................................................................................................. 24 Essential indicators in sta ndby mode ........................................................................................... .... 2 4 Headset ........................................................................................................................ ................................. 26 2. Getting s tarted ................... ......... ....... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......28 Installing the SIM card and the ba ttery........................................................................................ .. .... 2 8 Charging the battery ........................................................................................................... ..................... 31
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 4 Switching the ph one on and off ................................................................................................. .......... 31 Opening the flip ............................................................................................................... .......................... 33 Switching the keyb oard lights on or off ............................... ......................................................... .. 36 Keypad lock (Keyguard) ......................................................................................................... .................. 36 3. Call functio ns ................ ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .......... ......... .38 Making a call .................................................................................................................. ............................ 38 Speed dialling a phone number .............................................. .................................................... ....... 3 9 Making a confere nce call ......................................................... .............................................. ............. 4 0 Answering or rejecting a n incoming call ........................................................................................ .... 41 Call waiting ................................................................................... ................................ ........................... 41 Options during a call ............. ............................................................................................. ...................... 42 Loudspeaker ............................................................................................................................................. 4 2 4. Writing te xt ............ ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......44 Writing text using the messagin g keyboard ...................................................................................... 44 Typing accented characters ..................................................................................................... ........... 45 Writing text when the flip is closed ........................................................................................... ......... 46 Setting predictive text input on or off ........................................................................................ ..... 46 Using predictive text input .................................................................................................... .............. 46 Writing compoun d words ......................................................................................................... ........ 47 Using traditional text input ................................................................................................... ............. 47 Tips for writing text .......................................................................................................... ..................... 48 5. Contacts ........... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....50 Selecting settings for contacts ................................................................................................ .......... .... 5 0 Saving names and phone numbers (Add contact) ....................................................................... .... 51 Saving multip le numbers and text i tems per name ..................................................................... 51 Changing th e default number .................................................................................................... ..... 52 Searching for a nam e in contacts ............................................................................................... .......... 53
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 5 Editing a name, n umber or text item ............................................................................................ ...... 5 3 Erasing names and n umbers...................................................................................................... ............. 54 Copying contacts ............................................................................................................... ........................ 54 Sending and receiving a business card .................................... ...................................................... ..... 55 Speed dialling .......................... ....................................................................................... ............................ 5 6 Info numbers ............................ ....................................................................................... ............................ 56 Service numbers ...................... .......................................................................................... ......................... 56 My numbers ............................. ........................................................................................ ........................... 5 7 Caller groups ............................ ...................................................................................... ............................. 57 6. Using the menu ............. ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ........58 Accessing a menu function ...................................................................................................... .......... .... 58 List of menu functio ns ......................................................................................................... .................... 60 7. Menu functio ns ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ............ .68 Messages (Menu 1 ) ................ .............................................................................................. ..................... 68 Text messages (SMS service) .................................................................................................... .......... 68 Writing and sendin g messages ................................................................................................... .... 6 9 Options for sending a message .................................................................................................. ..... 69 Reading and replyi ng to a message ................................... ........................................................... 70 Inbox and sent item s folders ................................................ ................................................... ........ 71 Templates ................................................................................................................................................. 71 Inserting a text tem plate into a message .................................................................................... 72 Inserting a picture i nto a text message ....................................................................................... 7 2 Archive folder and my fold ers ................................................. ................................................. .......... 72 Distribution lists ............................................................................................................. ........................ 73 Multimedia messages ............................................................................................................ ............... 73 Writing and sendin g a multimedia m essage .............................................................................. 74 Reading and replyi ng to a multimedia message ....................................................................... 76
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 6 Inbox, Outbox, Sa ved and Sent items folders ......................................................................... .... 77 Multimedia messages mem ory full ........................................................................................... .... 7 7 Deleting messages .............. ................................................................................................ ................... 78 E-mail messages ................................................................................................................ ..................... 79 Writing and sendin g an e-mail............................................ ...................................................... ..... 79 Downloading e-ma il messages from your e-ma il account................................................. .... 8 0 Replying to an e-m ail message .................................................................................................. .... 81 Inbox, Outbox, Deleted item s, Sent items, Drafts and A rchive folders ............................... 81 E-mail settings ................. ............................................................................................... .................... 82 Options available for an e-ma il application ............................................................................... 84 Chat......................................... ................................................................................................................... 84 Voice messages ................................................................................................................. ...................... 85 Info messages .................................................................................................................. ........................ 86 Message settings ............................................................................................................... ..................... 86 Settings for text messages ..................................................................................................... .......... 87 Overwrite settings ............................................................................................................. ............. .... 88 Settings for multimedia messages ............................................................................................... .8 8 To receive the multimedia connection settings as a text message ..................................... 89 Font size setting .................. ............................................................................................ ....................... 90 Service commands ............................................................................................................... .................. 90 Call register (Menu 2) ......................................................................................................... ..................... 90 Recent calls lists ............................................................................................................. ........................ 91 Call counters and call timers .................................................................................................. ........ .... 9 1 Profiles (Menu 3) .................... .......................................................................................... ......................... 93 Settings (Menu 4) .............................................................................................................. ........................ 94 Time and date setti ngs ...... ................................................................................................... ................ 94 Clock .................................... ................................................................................................................... 94 Date .................................................................................................................................................... .... 95
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 7 Auto update of date and time ............................................. ...................................................... ..... 95 Call settings .................................................................................................................. ........................... 9 5 Call divert .................................................................................................................... ...................... .... 95 Anykey answer .................................................................................................................. ................... 96 Automatic red ial ...................................................................... ......................................... .................. 96 Speed dialling ................................................................................................................. ..................... 96 Call waiting ............................................................................... .................................... ....................... 97 Summary after call .......... ................................................................................................... ................ 97 Send my caller iden tity ........................................................................................................ ............. 97 Line for outgoing calls ... ..................................................................................................... .............. 97 Phone settings ..................... ............................................................................................ ....................... 98 Language ............................................................................................................................................... 98 Memory status.................. ................................................................................................ ................... 98 Security keyguard .............................................................................................................. ................. 98 Cell info displa y................ .............................................................................................. ..................... 99 Welcome note................... ................................................................................................ ................... 9 9 Network selection.................................................................... .......................................... ................. 99 Confirm SIM se rvice actions................................................. ................................................... ..... 10 0 Help text activation ................................................................ ........................................... ............. 100 Start-up tone .................................................................................................................. ................. . 100 Display settings............................................................................ ................................... ..................... 100 Wallpaper ................................................................................... ........................................................ 10 0 Colour schemes ........................................................................ ......................................... ............... 101 Operator logo .................................................................................................................. .................. 101 Screen saver .................................................................................................................. ................... 102 Display brightness ............................................................................................................. .............. 102 Tone settings .................................................................................................................. ...................... 102 Accessory settings ............................................................................................................. .................. 103
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 8 Security settings .............................................................................................................. .................... 104 Restore factory settings ....................................................................................................... ............ . 105 Organiser (Menu 5) ............................................................................................................. .................. . 106 Alarm clock .................................................................................................................... ...................... . 106 Calendar ......................................................................................... ........................................................ 10 7 Making a calendar no te ......................................................................................................... ........ 108 When the phone sounds an alarm for a note .......................................................................... 109 To-do list ..................................................................................................................... ......................... . 109 Notes (Menu 6) ................................................................................................................. ...................... 110 Radio (Menu 7) ................................................................................................................. ....................... 111 Tuning a radio cha nnel ......................................................................................................... ............. 112 Using the radio ................................................................................................................ .................... 113 Gallery (Menu 8) ............................................................................. .................................. ...................... 11 4 Games (Menu 9) ................................................................................................................. ..................... 116 Launching a game ............... ................................................................................................ ................ 116 Other options available for a game or game set .................................................................... 117 Game downloads ......................................................................... ........................................ ................ 11 7 Memory status for gam es ........................................................................................................ ......... 11 8 Game settings .................................................................................................................. .................... 118 Applications (Men u 10) ......................................................................................................... ............... 11 8 Launching an a pplication . ...................................................................................................... .......... 11 9 Other options availa ble for an applicatio n or application set ............................................ 119 Downloading an application ..................................................................................................... ...... . 12 0 Memory status for appl ications ................................................................................................. ..... 121 Extras (Menu 11) ............................................................................................................... ..................... 121 Calculator .............................................................................................................................................. 121 Perfoming a curren cy conversion .............................................................................................. . 1 22 Wallet .................................................................................................................................................... . 123
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 9 Saving and changing personal card information ........... ........................................................ 12 3 Personal notes ................................................................................................................. ................. 124 Wallet settings ................................................................................................................ ................. 124 Guidelines for paying for your purch ases with wallet ......................................................... . 125 Synchronisation ................... ............................................................................................. ................... 125 Synchronising from your phone .................................................................................................. 126 Saving the synch ronisation settings received as a tex t message ...................................... 127 Keying in the synch ronisation settings manually ................................................................. . 127 Synchronising from your PC ................................................. .................................................... .... 128 Countdown tim er ................................................................................................................ ................ 128 Stopwatch ..................................................................................... ................................. ....................... 129 Timing and split timi ng .. ...................................................................................................... .......... 129 Lap timing ..................................................................................................................... ..................... 130 Viewing and de leting times ..................................................................................................... .... . 13 0 Connectivity (M enu 12) ................................................................ ......................................... ............... 13 0 Infrared ................................................................................................................................ .................. 130 GPRS ....................................... ................................................................................................................ 132 WAP services (Menu 1 3)............................................................... .......................................... .............. 133 Basic steps for acc essing and using WAP services .................................................................... 134 Setting up the phone for a WA P service ..................................................................................... . 134 Saving the servic e settings received as a text message ....................................................... 134 Keying in the servic e settings manually ................................................................................... 135 Settings when GSM data i s the selected data bearer .............................................................. 136 Settings when GPRS is the sele cted data bearer ....................................................................... 137 Connecting to a WAP service .................................................................................................... ...... 138 Browsing the pages of a WAP service.......................................................................................... . 1 39 Using the phone keys while browsing ...................................................................................... . 139 Options while browsing . ........................................................................................................ ........ 139
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 10 Direct calling ..................... ............................................................................................ .................... 14 1 Ending a WAP conn ection ........................................................................................................ ........ 141 Appearance settings of the WA P browser ........................... ........................................................ 141 Bookmarks ............................................................................................................................................ . 142 Receiving a bookm ark ............................................................ ............................................... ......... 14 2 Service inbox .................................................................................................................. ...................... 143 Setting the phone to receive service messages ...................................................................... 143 The cache memory ............................................................................................................... ............... 14 4 Browser security settings ...................................................................................................... ............ 144 Security module ....................................................................... ......................................... ............... 144 Certificates ........................................................................................................................................ 14 5 Digital signature .............................................................................................................. ................ 147 Cookies ................................... ................................................................................................................ 147 SIM services (Menu 14) ......................................................................................................... ............... 148 8. PC Connectiv ity ...... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ............ ......... ......... ......... . 149 PC Suite ....................................................................................................................... ......... ..................... 14 9 GPRS, HSCSD and CSD ............................................................................................................ .......... 150 Using data communications a pplications ............................... ........................................................ 15 1 9. Battery infor mation....... ......... .......... ......... ......... ............ ......... ......... ......... ... 152 Charging and Discha rging ....................................................................................................... ............. 152 CARE AND MAIN TENANCE............... ......... .......... ......... ........... .......... ......... ..... 154 IMPORTANT S AFETY INFORMA TION................ .......... ........... ......... .......... ....... 155 Index ....... .......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ..... 161
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 11 FOR Y OUR SAFETY Read these simple gu idelines. Breaking the ru les may be dangerou s or illegal. Further detailed inform ation is given in this manual. Do not switch th e phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inte rference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST DonâÂÂt use a han d-held phone w hile driving. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interferen ce, which could aff ect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any re gulations or rul es. Switch the phon e off near med ical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING DonâÂÂt use the phone at a refuelling point. DonâÂÂt use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING DonâÂÂt use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, a nd follow any regu lations or rules. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal posit ion. DonâÂÂt tou ch the antenna unnecessarily.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 12 QUALIF IED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair ph one equipment. ACCESSORIES AND BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and bat teries. Do not connect incompatible products. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecti ng to any other device, read its userâÂÂs guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible produ cts. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make backup copies of all important data. WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water -resista nt. Keep it dr y. CALLING Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter the phone number, including the area co de, then press . To end a call, press . To answer a call, press . EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed (e.g. to e xit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear th e display. Enter the emergency number, the n press . Give your location. Do n ot end the call until told to do so.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 13 â Network Ser vices The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the EGSM 900 and GSM 1800 networks. Dualband is a network dependent feature. Check with your local service provider if you can subscribe to and use this feature. A number of features included in th is guide are called Netwo rk Services. These are special services th at you arra nge through your wireless service provi der. Before y ou can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you m ust subscribe to them through yo ur service provider and obtai n instructions for their use from you r service provider. Note: Some networ ks may not support a ll language-depen dent characters and/or services. â About accessories Check the model number of any charger b efore use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-7, A CP-8, ACP-12, LCH -9 and LCH-12. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers and accessories approved by th e phone manufacturer for use with t his particular phon e model. The use of a ny other ty pes may invalidat e any approval or warranty applyin g to the phone , and may be dangerous. For availability of a pproved accessories, please che ck with your deale r. When you disconnect t he power cord of any accessory, gr asp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 14 Access codes ⢠Security code (5 to 10 digits): The security code protects your phone against unauthorised use, and is supplied with the phone. The preset code is 12345. When you have changed the code, keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your phone. To change the code, and to set the phone to reque st it, see Security setti ngs on page 10 4 . If you key in an incorrect security code five times in succession, the phone may display Code error . Wait for five minutes and key in the code again. ⢠PIN code and PIN2 co de (4 to 8 digits): The PIN (Personal Identi fication Number) code protects your SIM card against unauthorise d use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. Set the phone to request the PIN code each time the phone is switched on, see Security settings on page 10 4 . The PIN2 code may be supplied with the SIM card and is require d to access some functions, such as charging unit counters. If you key in an incorrect PIN code t hree times in succession, the phone may display PIN code blocked and ask you to key in the PUK code. Contact your service provider to obtain the PUK code. ⢠PUK and PUK2 codes (8 digi ts): The PUK (Personal Unblocking Key) code is required to change a blocked PIN code. The PUK2 code is required to change a blocked PIN2 code.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 15 If the codes are not supplied wit h the SIM card, contact your local service provider. ⢠Barring password (4 digits): The barring password is required when using the Call barring service , see Security settings on page 10 4 . You can obtain the password from your service provider. ⢠Module PIN an d signing PIN : The module PIN is required to access the information in th e security module. See Security module on page 14 4 . The signing PIN is needed for the digital signature. See Digital signature on page 147 . The module PIN and the signing PIN are supplied with the SIM card if the SIM card has a security module in it. If you key in an incorrect PIN code se veral times, the phone may display PIN code blocked and ask you to key in t he PUK code. Contact your service provide r to get the PUK code. ⢠Wallet code (4-10 digi ts): The wallet code is require d to access the wallet services. If you key in a wrong wallet code several times, the wallet application is blocked for five minutes. For further information, see Wa ll e t on page 123 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 16 Overview of the phone functions Your Nokia 6800 phone is approved for use on EGSM 900 and GSM 1800 networks. It provides many functions which are practical for daily use, such as the messaging keyboard for easy and convenient writing, calendar, clock, alarm clock, countdown timer, calculator, games and many more. â Messaging concept Your phone combines the functions of a normal mobile phone and a messaging device. When the flip is closed you can use all functions of your phone like in any other mobile phone. By opening the flip of the phone you can use the additional messaging keyboard, which is specially designed for writing text easily and comfortably, see Writing and se nding messages on page 69 . â Multimedia messaging service (MMS) The phone is able to send multimedia messages that contain text and a picture and receive multimedia messages cont aining text, a polyphonic ringing tone and a picture. You can save the pictures and ringing tones for pe rsonalising your phone, see Multime dia messages on page 73 . â P olyphonic sound (MIDI) Polyphonic sound consists of several sound components that are played at the same time. Your phone can play four instruments at the same time from ove r 40
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 17 sound components presaved in your phone as ringing tones and message alert tones. The phone supports Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI) format. You can receive polyphonic ringing tones via the multimedia service, see Reading and replying to a mu ltimedia message on page 76 or you can download them via the gallery menu, see Gallery (Menu 8) on page 11 4 , or via PC Suite, see PC Suite on page 149 . â General P acket Radio Service (GPRS) GPRS technology allows mobile phones to be used for sending and re ceiving data over an Internet Protocol (IP) - based network. GPRS as such is a data bearer that enables wireless access to data networks such as the Internet. The applications that use GPRS are WAP services, MMS and text (SMS) messaging, downloading Java TM applications and the PC dial-up (for example, Interne t and e-mail). Note that your phone supports three simultaneous GPRS conne ctions. Before you can use GPRS technology ⢠Contact your network operator or se rvice provider for availability and subscription to the GPRS service. ⢠Save the GPRS settings for each of the applications used over GPRS. See Setting up the phone for a WAP service on page 134 , Message settings on page 86 and GPRS on page 132 . Pricing for GPRS and a pplications For more detailed information on pricing, contact your net work operator or service provider.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 18 â Loudspeaker This feature allows you to use your phone as a loudspeaker during a call, such as a conference call, and carry out other tasks simultaneously, while you talk. You can, for example, write messages, check your calendar notes or play games. See Loudspeaker on page 42 . â MIDP Java TM applications Your phone supports Java and includes some Java applications and games that have been especially designed for mobile phones. You can also download new applications and games to your phone, see Applic ations menu (Menu 10) on page 11 8 . â Stereo radio Your phone has an integrated stereo radio. You can listen to the radio using a headset or via the loudspeaker, see Radio (Menu 7) on page 111 . â Over the Air (OT A) settings service In order to use WAP, MMS, GPRS and othe r wireless services, you nee d to have proper settings on your phone. You may receive the settings directly as an OTA message and then save them on your phone. For more information on the availability of the settings, contact your network ope rator, service provider or the neares t authorised Nokia deale r.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 19 â Shared memory The following features in this phone may share memory: cont acts, text and multimedia messages, images and ringing tones in gallery, calendar, to-do not es, Java games, applications, notes application and e-mail. Using any such feature s may reduce the memory available for any features sharing memory. This is especially true with heavy use of any of the features (although some of the features may have a certain amount memory specially allotted to them in addition to the amount of memory shared with other features. For example, saving many images, Java applications etc. may take all of the shared me mory and your phone may display a message that the memory is full. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 20 1. Y our phone â Keys (flip closed) 1. Power key Switches the phone on and off. For example, when the keypad is locked, briefly pressing the power key turns the phone â s display lights on for approximately 15 seconds. 2. Volume k ey Adjusts the volume of the earpiece, the headset an d the loudspeaker. 3. Selection ke ys and The function of the keys depends on the guiding text shown on the display
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 21 above the keys, for example Menu and Contacts in standby mode. 4. 4-way joystick Enables scrolling through names, phone numbers, menus or settings. The 4- way joystick is also used to move the cursor up and down, and right and left when writing text, using the calendar, and in some game applications. 5. dials a phone number, and answers a call. In standby mode it shows the most recently called number. 6. ends an active call. Exits from any functio n. 7. - enter numbers and charact ers. and are used for various purposes in different functions. 8. Ear piece â Connectors 1. Charger connector 2. Pop-Port TM connector for headsets, data cable and other accessories. 3. Infrared (IR) port 4. Loudspeaker 5. Microphone
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 22 â Keys (flip open) When you open the flip, the display graphics are rotated 90 degrees and the left and right selection keys change positions, but the guiding texts above t he left and right selection keys do not change. For using the keys to writ e and edit text, see Writing text using the messaging keyboard on page 44 . 1. Keyboard lig ht key switches the keyboard light on or off to provide additional lighting while using the keyboard. See also Switching the keyboard lights on or off on page 36 . 2. Profile key opens a list of profiles when pressed briefly. Pressing and holding down the key switches the phone off. 3. Backspace deletes characters. 4. Enter key forces a line feed when editing te xt.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 23 5. Shift keys and enter upper case letters and symbols. You can either press the shift key first and then t he desired key or press both keys at the same time. 6. Space b ar keys and enter a space. 7. Power key/ Left sele ction key switches the power on, whe n the phone â s messaging keyboard is open and the phone is switched off. The function of the left selection key depends on the guiding text shown on the display above the key. 8. Character key (Chr) opens a set of characters and symbols during editing. â Standby mode When the phone is ready for use (the flip can be either closed or open), and you have not keyed in any characters, the phone is in standby mode. 1. Shows the name of the network in which the phone is currently being used, or the operator logo when no wallpaper is displayed. 2. Shows the signal strength of the cellular network at your current lo cation. The higher t he bar, the stronger the signal. 3.Shows the battery charge level. The higher the bar, the more power in the battery 4.The left selection key in st andby mode is Menu .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 24 5. The right selection key in standby mode is Contacts . See also Essential indicators in standby mode on page 24 . Screen saver With the flip closed, the phone automatically activates a digital clock screen saver to save power in standby mode. It will be activated after a certain length of time when none of the phone functions have been used, see Screen saver on page 102 . Press any key or open the flip to deactivate the screen saver. Note that if you have not set the time, 00:00 is displayed. To set the time, see Clock on page 94 . Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background pict ure as wallpaper when the phone is in standby mode, see Wallpaper on page 10 0 . Essential indicators in standby mode You have received one or several text or pictu re messages. See Reading and replying to a message on page 70 . You have received one or several multimedia messages. See Writing an d sending a mult imedia message on page 74 . You have received one or several voice messages. See V oice messages on page 85 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 25 The phone â s keypad is locked. See Keypad lock (K eyguard) on page 36 . and Security keyguard on page 98 . The phone does not ring for an incoming call or a text me ssage because Incoming call alert is set to Off and Message alert tone is set to Off . See Ton e se tt in g s on page 102 . The alarm clock is set to On . See Alarm clock on page 10 6 . The countdown ti mer is running. See Countdown timer on page 128 . The stopwatch is running in the background. See Stopwatch on page 129 . When GPRS connection is established, the indicator is shown on the top left of the display. See GPRS connection on page 132 and Browsing the pages of a WAP service on page 139 . The GPRS connection is suspended (on h old), for example, if th ere is an incoming or outgoing call during a GPRS dial-up connection. Infrared connection indicator. See Infrared on page 130 . All your calls are diverted to another number. If you have two phone lines, the divert indicator for the first line is and for the second line is . See Call divert on page 95 . or If you have two phone lines, the indicator displays the selected phone line. See Line for outgoing calls on page 97 . The loudspeaker has be en activated. See Loudspeaker on page 42 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 26 Calls are limited to a closed user group. See Security settin gs on page 10 4 . The timed profile is selected. See Profiles (Menu 3) on page 93 . , or A headset, handsfree or loopset accessory is connected to the phone. To enable the phone to show the time and date in standby mode. See Clock on page 94 and Date on page 95 . â Headset Connect the HDS-3 or HDB-4 headset to the Pop-Port connector of your phone as shown in the picture .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 27 You can carry the headset as shown in the pictur e.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 28 2. Getting started â Installing the SIM card and the battery ⢠Keep all mini ature SIM cards out o f the reach of sma ll children . ⢠The SIM card and its contacts can easily be damaged by scratches or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting or removing the card. ⢠Before installing the SIM card, always make sure that the phone is switched off and then remove the batte ry. 1. With the back of the phone facing you, press the back cover release button (1) and slide the back cover off the phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 29 2. To release the SIM card holder, slide the card holder backwards (2) and lift it up (3). 3. Insert the SIM card into the SIM card holder (4). Make sure t hat the SIM card is properly inserted and that the golden contact area on the card is facing downwa rds. 4. Close the SIM card holder (5) and slide it back to its place (6) .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 30 5. Replace the battery (7). 6. Direct the back cover towards the locking catches on the front cover 8) and slide the back cover until it locks into place (9).
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 31 â Charging the battery 1. Connect the lead from the charger to the socket on the bottom of your phon e. 2. Connect the charger to an A C wall socket. The text Charging is displayed briefly if the phone is switched on. If the battery is completely flat, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. You can use the phone while the charger is connected. The charging time depends on the charger and the battery used. For example, charging a BLC-2 battery with the ACP-12 charger takes about 1 hour and 30 minutes while the phone is in standby mode. â Switching the phone on and off To switch the phone on or off, when the flip is closed, press and hold the power key . To switch the phone off when the messaging keyboard is open, press and hold the profile key on the top right corner of the display. To switch the power on, when the phone â s messaging keyboard is open and the phone is switched off, press the power key (left selection key) .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 32 Note that if the phone displays Insert SIM card even t hough the SIM card is properly inserted, or SIM card not supported , contact your network operat or or service provider. Your phone does not support 5-Volt SIM cards and the card may need to be changed. ⢠If the phone asks for a PIN code, key in the PIN code (displayed as ****), and press OK . See also PIN code request in Security settings on page 10 4 and on page 10 4 . ⢠If the phone asks for a security code, key in the security code (displayed as *****), and press OK . See also Access codes on page 14 . Warning: Do not switch the phone on when wi reless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. TIPS ON EFFICIENT OPE RATION: Your phone has a built-in antenna . As with any other radio transmitt ing device, do no t touch the ante nna unnecessarily when the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call qua lity and may cause the phon e to operate at a high er power level than otherwise needed. Not touching the antenna area du ring a phone call opt imises the ant enna performan ce and the talktime of you r phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 33 â Opening the flip 1. Hold the phone with both hands and open the flip as shown in picture (1).
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 34 2. Turn the flip until you hear it click into place (2). Make sure that the golden contacts of the flip and the phone touch each other. 3. Turn the phone to a horizontal position and hold it as shown in picture (3) . The loudspeaker function automatically activates when the flip is o pen.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 35
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 36 Switching the keyb oard lights on or off ⢠The keyboard lights are not lit automatically, when you open the flip. To turn on the lights, press the light key on the top left corner of the keyboard. The keyboard lights are switched off after a certain time, but they are turned on again as soon as you press any key. ⢠To switch the keyboard lights off, press the keyboard light key or close the flip. â Keypad lock (K eyguard) You can lock the keypad to prevent the ke ys being accidentally pressed, for example, when your phone is in your handbag. You can lock the keypad only when the flip is closed. ⢠Locking the keypad In standby mode, press Menu and then within 1.5 seconds. ⢠Unlocking the keypad Press Unlock and then within 1.5 seconds or open the flip. Not e that the keyguard will not be activated, if you close the flip. To answer a call when the keyguard is on, press . During a call, the phone can be operated normally. When you end or reject the call, the keypad will be locked automatically.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 37 For locking the keypad during a call, see Options during a call on page 42 and for setting the secu rity keyguard, see Security keyguard on page 98 . Note: When Keyguar d is on, calls ma y be possible to the emergency number programm ed into your phone (e.g. 112 or other official eme rgency number). Key in the emergency n umber and press . The number is displayed on ly after you have keyed in its last digit.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 38 3. Call functions â Making a call 1. Key in the phone number, including the area code. If you key in an incorrect character, press Clear to delete it. With the flip open in standby mode, pressing any number key starts a call procedure. For international ca lls, press twice for the internation al prefix or if the flip is open, (the character re places the international access code) and then key in the country code, the area code without t he leading 0, if necessary, and finally the phone number. 2. Press to cal l the number. 3. Press to end the call or to cancel th e call attempt. See also Options during a call on page 42 . Making a call using con tacts ⢠See Searching for a name in contacts on page 53 . Press to call the number on the display. Last number redialling ⢠In standby mode, press once to access the list of the last 20 numbers you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number or name that you want, and press to cal l the number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 39 Calling your voice mailbox ⢠In standby mode when the flip is closed, press and hold , or press and When the flip is open, press and hold the corresponding number k ey on the keyboard. If the phone asks for the voice mailbox number, key it in and press OK . See also V oice messages on page 85 . Speed dialling a phone num ber Before you can use speed dialling, do as follows: 1. Press Menu , select Settings , Call settings and Speed dialling . Set t he setti ng to On . See also Speed dialling on page 96 . 2. Assign a phone number to one of the s peed dialling keys from to , see Speed dialling on page 56 . 3. Call the number in either of the foll owin g ways: ⢠Press the speed dialling key you want and then press . You can also activate speed dialling by pressing the corresponding number key, when the flip is open. ⢠If Speed dialling is set to on, press and hold a speed dialling key until the call is started.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 40 Making a conference call Conference call ing is a network service that allows up to si x people to take part in a conference call. 1. Make a call to the first participant. 2. To make a call to a new participant, press Options and sel ect New call . 3. Key in the phone number of the new participant, or retrieve it from the memory, and press Call . The first call is put on hold. 4. When the new call has been answered, join t he first participan t in the conference call. Press Options and sel ect Conference . 5. To add a new participant to the call, repeat steps 2 to 4. 6. To have a private conversation with one of the participants: Press Options and select Private and selec t the desired participant. Rejoin the conference call as described in step 4. 7. To end the confer ence call, press .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 41 â Answering or rejecting an incoming call Press to answer an incoming call and press to end the call. Press to reject an incoming call. If you press Silence , only the ringing tone is muted. Th en either answer or reject the call. If the HDB-4 or HDS-3 headset is connected to the phone, you can answer and end a call by pressing the headset key. Tip: If the Divert if busy function is activated to divert the calls, for example to your voice mailbox, rejecting an incoming call will also divert the call. See Call divert on page 95 . Note that when somebody is calling you, the phone shows the caller â s name, phone number, or the text Private number or Call. If more than one name is found in contacts wit h the same phone n umber as the call er â s number, only the caller â s number will be displayed, if this is ava ilable. Call waiting During a call, press to answer the wa iting call. The first call is put on hold. Press to end the active call. To activate the Call waitin g function, see Call waitin g on page 97 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 42 â Options during a call Many of the options that you can use during a call, are network services. Press Options during a call for some of the following options: Mute or Unmute , En d call , End all calls , Contacts , Menu and Hold or Unhold , New call , Con ference , Private , Answer , Reject and Lou dspeaker or Handset . Lock keypad to activate the keypad lock. Send DTMF to send DTMF tone strings, for example passwords or bank account numbers. Key in the DTMF string or search for it in contacts and press OK . Note that you can key in the wait character w and the pause character p by repeatedly pressing . Swap to switch between the active call and the call on hold, Trans fe r to connect a call on hold to an active call, and to disconnect yourself from the calls. Loudspeaker You can use your phon e as a loudspeaker duri ng a call. Do not hold the phone to your ear during loudspeaker operation. To activate the l oudspeaker: ⢠Open the flip. Or: ⢠When the flip is closed, press Options and select Loudspeaker or press Loudsp. , if available. To deactivate the loudspeaker during a call: ⢠Close the flip or press Handset , when t he flip is open. Or:
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 43 ⢠When the flip is closed, press Options and select Handset or press Handset , if available. If you have connected t he CARK126 handsfree unit or the headset to the phone, Handset in the option s list is replaced with Handsfree or Headset and the selection key Handset with Handsfr . or Headset respectively. The loudspeaker is deactivated automatically when you end the call or call attempt, connect the handsfree unit or headset to the phone, or close the flip. Using the loudspeaker wit h the stereo radio, see Radio (Menu 7) on page 111 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 44 4. Writing text Your phone is especially designed for easy and comfortable text writing. The easiest way is to write with your thumbs using the messaging keyboard. You can, for example, start writing a message using the keyboard, close the flip and continue writing the same text using ei ther traditional or pred ictive text input. Note that the predict ive text input is n ot available, whe n the flip is open. â Writing text using the messaging keyboard You can write a text message in two ways, when the flip is open. Press Menu an d select Messages , Text messages and Create message , see Writing and sending messages on page 69 . Tip: To quickly start writing a message, move the joystick to the le ft in standby mode. Or: Press any of the letter keys in standby mode to open the Notes application, see Notes (Menu 6) on page 11 0 . The following functions are available when writing text, when the flip is open: ⢠To insert a number, press any of the number ke ys. Pressing a number key in standby mode initiates a normal call procedure. ⢠To switch between the lower and upper case, indicated by , or on the top left of the display, or t o key in symbols, press one of the shift keys or . You can either press the shift key and the desired character
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 45 consecutively, or press and hold both the shift key and the desired letter key at the same time. To write in uppe r case only, press or twice. ⢠To delete characters from the display, press or Clear . Pressing backspace briefly clears one character at a time, while longer keypress deletes characters more quickly. ⢠To add a space, press one of the space keys ( or ) at the bottom of the keyboard. ⢠To force a line feed, press . Typing accented characters The characters available depend on the language selected in the Language menu, see Langu age on page 98 . To type accented characters or symbols that are not printed on the keyboard, do one of t he following: ⢠To access a set of punctuation marks, accented characters and symbols, press the character key . Scroll through the character set by moving the joystick and press Use to select a character. ⢠To type an accen ted character that is not included in the li st of special characters under , such as á , press and hold and simultaneously press â aâ repeatedly until the de sired accented variant of â aâ appears on t he display.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 46 â Writing text when the flip is closed You can use predictive or traditional text inpu t when the phone â s flip is closed .When you are writing text, predictive text input is indicated by and traditional text input by on the top left of the display. You can change the character case, indicated by , or by pressing . The number mode is indicated by , and you can switch between the letter and number modes by pressing and holding . Setting pr edictive text input on or off When writing text, press Options and select Dictionary . ⢠To set the predictive te xt input on, select a language in the dictionary options list. Predictive text input is only available for the languages on the list. ⢠To revert to tr aditional text input, select Dictionary off . Tip: To quickly set the predictive text input on or off when writing text, press twice, or press and hold Options . Using predictive text input You can key in any le tter with a single keypress. Predictive text input is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can also add new words. 1. Start writing a word using the keys to . Press each key only once for one letter. The word may change after each keystroke.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 47 Example: T o write Nokia when the English diction ary is selected, press once for N, once for o, once for k, once for i and once for a. To insert a number while in letter mode, press and hold t he desired number key. For more instructions for writing text, see Tips for writing text on page 48 . 2. When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, confirm it by adding a space with or by moving the joystick to the right. If the word is not the one you are looking for, press repeatedly or press Options and select Matches . When the word you want appears, confirm it. 3. If the ? character is displayed after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add the word to the dictionary, press Spell , key in the word (traditional text input is used) and press Save . When the dict ionary becomes full, the new word replaces the oldest one that was added. 4. Start writing the next word. Writing compound wo rds Key in the first part of the word and confirm it by moving the joystick to the right. Write the last part of the word and confirm it by moving the joystick to the right. Using traditional text input Press a number key, to , repeatedly until the desired character appears. Not all characters a vailable under a number key are printed on the key. The characters available depend on the language selected in the Language menu, see Langu age on page 98 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 48 To insert a number while in lette r mode, press and hold the desired number key. ⢠If the next letter you want is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears, or move the joystick to the right, and then key in the letter. ⢠The most common punctuation marks and special characters are availa ble under the number key . More instructions for writing text, see Tips for writ ing text on page 48 . Tips for writing text The following functions may also be available for writing text in pred ictive or traditional i nput: ⢠To insert a space, press . ⢠To move the cursor to the right, left, up or down, move the joystick respectively. ⢠To delete a character from the display, press Clear . Press and hold Clear to delete the characters more quickly. To delete all the characters simultaneousl y when writing a message, press Options and select Clear text . ⢠To insert a word that is not in the dictionary when using tpredictive text input, press Options and select Insert word . Write th e word using tradition al text input and press Save . The word is also added to the dictionary.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 49 ⢠To insert a special characte r when using tradition al text input, press or when using predictive text input, press and hold , or press Options and select Insert symbol . Move the cursor with the joyst ick to a character and press Use to select it. You can also scroll to a character by pressing , , or , and select it by pressing . The following options are available when wri ting text messages: ⢠To insert a phone number while in the le tter mode, press Options and selec t Insert number . Key in the number or search for it in contacts and press OK . ⢠To insert a name from contacts, press Options and select Insert contact . To insert a phone number or a text it em attached to the name, press Options and select View details .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 50 5. Contacts You can save names and phone numbers (contacts) in both the phone â s memory and in the SIM card â s memory. ⢠You may save up to 500 names with numbers, addresses and text for each name in the phone â s memory. The number of names that can be saved depends on both the length of the names, and t he number and length of the phone numbers and text it ems. Contacts use shared memory, see Shared memory on p age 19 . ⢠The phone supports SIM cards that can save up to 250 names and phone numbers. Names and numbers that are saved in t he SIM card â s memory, are indicated by . â Selecting set tings for conta cts 1. Press Contacts and select Settings . Sel ect 2. Memory in use to select the memory, either SIM card or phone, that you want to use for your contacts. To recall names and numbers from both memories for contacts , select Phone and SIM . In this case, the names and numbers will be saved in the phone â s memory. 3. Contacts view to select how the names (and numbers) in contacts are displayed.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 51 4. Memory status to see how many names and phone numbers are currently saved and how many can still be saved in the sele cted memory for contacts. â Saving names and phone numbers (Add contact) Names and numbers will be saved in the memory in use, see Selectin g settings for contacts above. 1. Press Contacts and select Add contact . 2. Key in the name an d press OK . See Using traditiona l text input on page 47 . 3. Key in the phone number, and press OK . To key in numbers, see Making a call on page 38 . 4. When the name and n umber have been saved, press Done . Tip: Quick save: In standby mode, key in the phone number. Pre ss Options and select Save . Key in the name, press OK and Done . Saving multiple numbers and text items per name You can save different types of phone numbers and short text items for each name in the phone â s internal memory for contacts. The first number save d is automatically set as the default number and it is indicated by a frame around the number type indicator, for example . When you select a name from contacts, for example to make a call, the de fault number is used unless you se lect another number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 52 1. Make sure that the memory in use is either Phone or Phone and SIM . See Selecting settings for contacts on page 50 . 2. To access the list of names and phone numbe rs, move the joystick up or down in standby mode. 3. Scroll to the name saved in the phone â s internal contact s to which you want to add a new number or text item, and pre ss Details . 4. Press Options and select Add number or A dd detail . 5. Select one of the following number types: General Mobile , Home , Office and Fax . or text types E-mail address , Web address , P ostal address and Note . To change the number or text type, select Change t ype in the options li st. 6. Key in the number or t ext item and pre ss OK to save it. 7. Press Back and then Exit to return to standby mode . Changing the default numb er Move the joystick up or down in standby mode, scroll to the name that you want and press Details . Scroll to th e number that you want to set as th e default number. Press Options and select Set as default .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 53 â Searching for a name in contacts 1. Press Contacts and select Search . 2. You can key in the first characters of the name you are searching for in the pop-up window. Move the joystick up or down to scroll through the names in the list, and right or left to move the cursor in the pop-up window 3. Scroll to the name you wa nt, and press Details . Scroll to view th e details of the selected name. Tip: To quickly find a name and phone number, move the joystick up or down in standby mode. Key in the first letter(s) of the name, and/or scroll to the name you want. Tip: To quickly view a specific name with the default number, when the flip is closed, press and hold at the name while scrolling through names. â Editing a name, number or text item Search for the name (and number) that you want to edit and press Details . Scroll to the name, number or text item you want to e dit, and press Options . Select Edit name , Edit number , or Edit detail , and edit the name, number, or text and pre ss OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 54 â Erasing names and numbers Press Contacts and select Delete . ⢠To delete names and numbers one by one, select One by one and scroll to the name (and number) tha t you want to delete. Pre ss Delete and press OK to confirm. ⢠To delete names and numbers in contacts simultaneously, select Delete all and then scroll to contacts, Phone or SIM card and press Delete . Press OK and confirm with the security code. â Copying contacts You can copy names and phone numbers from the phone â s memory to your SIM card â s memory and vice versa. 1. Press Contacts and select Copy . 2. Select the copying direction, From phone to SIM card or From SIM card to phone . 3. Select One by one , All or Default numbers . ⢠If you select One by one , scroll to the name that you want to copy and press Copy . Default numbers is shown if you copy from the phone to the SIM card. Only the default numbers will be copied. 4. To choose whether you want to keep or delete the original names and numbers, select Keep original or Mo ve original .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 55 ⢠If you select All or Default numbers , press OK when Start copying? or Start moving? is displayed. â Sending and receiving a business card You can send and recei ve a person â s contact information as a business card either via IR or as an Over The Air (OTA) message if supported by the network. Receiving a business card To receive a business card via IR, make sure that your phone is ready to receive data through its IR port, see Infrared on page 130 . The user of the other compatible phone can now send the name and phone number via Infrared. When you have received a business card via IR or as an OTA message, press Show . Press Save to save the business card in the phone â s memory. To discard the business card, press Exit and then OK . Sending a business card You can send a business card via IR or as an OTA message to a compatible phone or other handheld device which supports the vCard standard. ⢠To send a business card, search contacts for the name and phone number you want to send, press Details and Options and sel ect Send bus. card . ⢠To send the business card via IR, make sure that the other phone or the PC is set up to receive data via its IR port and select Via infrared . ⢠To send the business card a s an OTA message, select Via text message .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 56 â Speed dialling To assign a number to a speed dialling key, press Contacts , select Speed dials and scroll to the desired speed dialling key number. Press Assign , press Search , and select first the name and then the number you want to assign. If the Speed dialling function is off, the phone asks whether you want to activate it. Press Ye s to activate it, see Spe ed dialling on page 96 . To make a call using the speed dialling keys, see Speed dialling a phone number on page 39 . â Info numbers You can call the information numbers of your service provider. The numbers may be included in your SIM card. Press Contacts and select Info numbers . Scroll through a category to an information number and press to call the number. â Service numbers You can call the service numbers of your se rvice provider. The numbers may be included in your SIM card. Press Contacts and select Service numbers . Scroll t o a service number and press to call the nu mber.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 57 â My numbers The phone numbers assigned to your SIM card are saved in My numbers if this is allowed by the card. To view the numbers press Cont acts and select My numbers . Scroll to the desired name or number, and press View . â Caller groups You can arrange the names and phone numbers saved in contacts into caller groups. For each caller group, you can set the phone to sound a spe cific ringing tone and show a selected graphic on the display whe n you receive a call from a phone number in the group, see below. To set the phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers belonging to a selected caller group, see Alert for in Tone settings on page 10 2 . Press Contacts , sele ct Caller groups and select the desired caller group. Select ⢠Group name , key in a new name for the caller group and pre ss OK . ⢠Group ringing tone and select the ringing tone for the group. Default is the ringing tone selected for the currently active profile. ⢠Group logo and select On to set the phone to display the group logo, Off not to display it or View to view the logo. ⢠Group members to add a name to the caller group, press Options and select Add contact . Scroll to the name that you want to add to the group and press Add . To remove a name from a caller group, scroll to the desired name, press Options and select Remove contact .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 58 6. Using the menu The phone offers you an extensive range of functions, which are grouped into menus. Most of the menu functions are provided wit h a brief help text. To view the help text, scroll to the menu function you want and wait for 15 seconds. To exit the help text, press Back . See Help text activation on page 10 0 . â Accessing a menu function By scrolling 1. To access the menu, press Menu . 2. Scroll through the menu by moving the joystick up or down and select, for example, Setti ngs by pressing Select . 3. If the menu contai ns submenus, select t he one you want, for example Call settings . 4. If the selected submenu contains further submenus, repeat step 3. Sel ect the next submenu, for example Anykey answer . 5. Select the setting of your choice. 6. Press Back to return to the previous menu level, and Exit to exit t he menu. By using a shortcut The menus, submenus and setting options are numbe red and you can access most of them by using their shortcut number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 59 ⢠To access the menu, press Menu . Key in quickly, within two seconds, the index number of the menu function you want to access. Example: To set the Anykey answer to On , press Menu , , , and . Press Back to return to the previ ous menu level, and Exit to exit the menu . Note that accessing the men u functions in menu 1, press Menu , , and the rest of the digits of the shortcut number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 60 â List of menu functions 1. Messages 1. Text messages 1. Create message 2. Inbox 3. Sen t items 4. Archive 5. T emplates 6. My folders 7. Distribut ion lists 8. Delete messages 2. Multimedia msgs. 1. Create message 2. Inbox 3. Outbox 4. Sen t items 5. Saved items 6. Delete messages 3. E-mail 1. Open 1. Create e- mail 2. Retrieve 3. Sen d now 4. Send and re trieve 5. Inbox 6. Outbox 7. Del eted items
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 61 8. Sen t items 9. Drafts 10.Archive 11.Settings 2. Web access 3. Servi ce settings 4. Details 4. Chat 5. Voice messages 1. Listen to voice messages 2. Voice mailbox number 6. Info me ssages 1. Info service 2. T opics 3. Language 4. Info t opics saved on SIM card 5. Read 1 7. Message settings 1. Text messages 2. Multimedia msgs. 3. Oth er settings 8. Service commands 2. Call register 1. Misse d calls 1. This menu is shown only if any info messages are received .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 62 2. Rece ived calls 3. Dia lled numbers 4. Delete recent call lists 1. All 2. Missed 3. Received 4. Dialled 5. Call duration 1. Last call duration 2. Rece ived calls â duration 3. Dialled calls â duration 4. Al l calls â duration 5. Cl ear timers 6. Ca ll costs 1. La st call units 2. Al l calls â units 3. Ca ll cost settings 7. GPRS data cou nter 1. Data sent in last session 2. Data received in last session 3. Al l sent data 4. Al l received data 5. Cl ear counters 8. GPRS con nection timer 1. Duration of last session 2. Duration of all sessions 3. Cl ear timers
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 63 3. Profiles 1. General 1. Activate 2. P ersonalise 3. Timed 2. Sil ent (same submenus as in General) 3. Meet ing (same submenus as in Ge neral) 4. Out door (same submenus as in General) 5. Pager (same submenus as in General) 4. Settings 1. Ti me and date settings 1. Clock 2. Date 3. Au to-update of date & time 2. Ca ll settings 1. Ca ll divert 2. Anykey answer 3. Au tomatic redial 4. Speed dialling 5. Ca ll waiting 6. Summary after call 7. Send my caller identity 8. Line for outgoing calls 1 3. Phone set tings 1. For availability, contact your network operator or service provider.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 64 1. Language 2. Memory st atus 3. Security keyguard 4. Cell info display 5. Welcome note 6. Network se lection 7. Confirm SIM service actions 8. He lp text activation 9. Sta rt-up tone 4. Display settings 1. W allpaper 2. Col our schemes 3. Operator logo 4. Screen saver t imeout 5. Displ ay brightness 5. Tone settin gs 1. Incoming call alert 2. Ri nging tone 3. Ri nging volume 4. Vibrating alert 5. Message alert t one 6. Keypad tones 7. Warning tones 8. Alert for 6. Accessory sett ings 1 1. This menu is shown only if the phone is or has been connected to a headset, handsfree unit or loops et availabl e for the phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 65 7. Secu rity settings 1. PIN code request 2. Call barring service 3. Fix ed dialling 4. Closed use r group 5. Security le vel 6. Acce ss codes 8. Restore factory settings 5. Organiser 1. Alarm clock 2. Calendar 3. To-do list 6. Notes 7. Radio 8. Gallery 1. View folders 1. Graphics 2. Tones 2. Add folder 3. Del ete folder 4. Ren ame folder 5. Gallery downloads 1. Image downloads
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 66 2. Tone downloads 9. Games 1. Select game 2. Game downloads 3. Memory 4. Settings 1. Ga me sounds 2. Ga me lights 3. Shakes 10.Applications 1. Select application 2. App. downloads 3. Memory 11.Extras 1. Calculator 2. Wallet 1. Cards 2. Personal notes 3. Settings 3. Synchronisation 1. Synchronise 2. Settings 4. Coun tdown timer 5. Stopwatch
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 67 12.Connectivity 1. Infrared 2. GPRS 1. GPRS con nection 2. GPRS mode m settings 13.Services 1. Home 2. Bookmarks 3. Service inbox 4. Settings 1. Conn ection settings 2. Appe arance settings 3. Secu rity settings 4. Service inbox settings 5. Go t o address 6. Clear the cache 14.SIM services 1 1. Only shown if su pported by your SIM card. The nam e and contents vary dependi ng on the SIM card
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 68 7. Menu functions â Messages (Menu 1) Note: When sending messages via the SMS netwo rk service, your phone may display the words " Message sent ". This is an indication that the message has been sent by your phone to th e message centre n umber programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination . For more details ab out SMS services, che ck with your service provider. You can read, write, send and save text, mult imedia, and e-mail messages. All messages are organised in folders. Before you can send any text or pict ure messages, you need to save your me ssage centre number, see Me ssage settings on page 86 . Text messages (SMS service) Your phone can send and receive multi-part me ssages which consist of several ordinary text messages (network service). Invoicing is based on the number of ordinary messages that are required for a multi-part message. You can also send and receive tradit ional picture messages that contain text and a picture. Each picture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one text message.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 69 Note: Picture message fun ction can be u sed only if it is sup ported by your ne twork operator or service provid er. Only phones that offer picture message features can receive and display picture m essages. Writing and sending message s The number of available characters and the current part number of a multi-part message are shown on the top right of the display. 1. Press Menu and select Messages , T ext me ssages and Create message . Tip: To quickly start writing a message, move the joystick to the left in standby mode. 2. Key in a message, see W riting text on page 44 . To insert text templates or a picture into th e message, see Te m pl at e s on page 71 . 3. To send the message, pres s Options , and select Send 4. Enter the recipient â s phone number or search for it in contacts. Press OK to send the message. Options for sending a message After you have written a message, press Options and select Sending options . ⢠To send a message to several recipients, select Se nd to many . When you have sent the message to everyone you wan t to send it to, press Done . ⢠To send a message using a distribution list, select Send to lis t . For creating a distribution list, see Distribution lists on page 73 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 70 ⢠To send a message using a message profile, select Sending profile and the n the desired message profile. For defining a message profile, see Message settings on page 86 . Reading and repl ying to a message When you have received a message, the indicator and the number of new messages followed by message(s) received are shown. The blinking indicates that the message memory is full. Before you can receive new messages, delete some of your old messages. The text messages function uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . 1. Press Show to view the new message, or pre ss Exit to view it later. Reading the message later: Press Menu , select Messages , Text messages and Inbox . 2. If more than one message has be en received, select the on e that you want to read. An unread text message is indicated by in front of it. 3. While reading or viewing the message, press Options . You can select an option, for example, to delete, forward or edit the message as a text message, move and rename the message you are reading. Select Copy t o calendar to copy text from the beginning of the message to your phone â s calendar as a memo for the current day. Select Message details to view the sender â s name and phone number, the message centre used, and the date and t ime of receipt.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 71 Select Use detail to extract numbers, e-mail and website addresses from the current message. When viewing a picture message, select Save pict ure to save the picture in the Tem pl a te s folder. 4. Select Reply to re ply to a message. Select Ori ginal text to include the original message in the reply, or select a standard answer to be included in the reply, or select Empty screen . 5. Press Options , select Send , and press OK to send the message to the displayed number. Inbox and sent items folders The phone saves incoming text messages in the Inbox folder and sent messages in the Sent items folder of the Text messages subme nu. Text messages that you wish to send later can be saved in the Archive , My folders or Te m pl at es folder. Templates Your phone includes text templates, indicated by , and picture template s, indicated by . To access the template list, press Menu an d select Messages , Text messages and Tem pl a te s .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 72 Inserting a text templa te into a messa ge ⢠When you are writing or replying to a message, press Options . Select Use template and sel ect the template that you want to insert. Inserting a picture i nto a text message ⢠When you are writing or replying to a message, press Options . Select Ins ert picture and select a picture to view it. Press Insert to insert the picture into your message. The indicator in the header of the message indicates that a picture has been attached. The number of characters that you can include in a message depends on the size of the pict ure. To view the text and the picture together before sending t he message, press Options and select Preview . Archive folder and my folde rs To organise your messages, you can move some of t hem to the Archive folder, or add new folders for your messages. While reading a message, press Options . Select Move , scroll to the folder to which you want to move the message and press Select . To add or delete a folder, press Menu, select Messages , Text messages and My folders . ⢠To add a folder, press Options and select Add folder . ⢠To delete a folder, scroll to the folder that you want to delete, press Options and select Delete folder .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 73 Distributio n lists You can save di stibution lis ts in the phone â s memory, containing a fix ed number of people to whom you regularly send messages. If the message fails to send, an Undelivered folder will appear containing a list of the recipient(s) who did not receive the message. 1. Press Menu , select Messages , Text messages and Distribution lists . 2. Press Add to create a new list. The option is shown, if you have not saved an y lists in the folder. Or: Press Options and select A dd list . 3. Key in the name for the list and press OK . 4. To add a name to the newly created list, press Options and select View list . 5. Press Options and select Add contact . Search for the name in contacts, select it and press OK . The other options in the Optio ns list include View list , Rename list , Clear list and Delete list . In the Undelivered folder you can, for example, select View message to view the message that failed to send or Resend to list to sen d the message again. Multimedia messages Note: This function can be used only if it is suppor ted by your network operat or or service provider . Only phones th at offer compa tible multimedia m essage features can receive and displa y multimedia messages. You can send multimedia messages containing text and a pict ure and receive multimedia message s containing text , a polyphonic ri nging tone and a picture.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 74 The phone supports multimedia messages that are up to 45 kB in size. If the maximum size is exceeded, t he phone may not be able to receive the message. Depending on the network, you may receive a text message that includes an Internet address where you can view the multimedia message. If the message contains a picture that is larger t han the display area, the phone scales it down to fit the display area. Note: If Allow multimedia reception is set to Ye s or In home network , your operator or service provider may charge you for every message you receive. Multimedia messaging supports the following formats: ⢠Picture: JPEG, GIF, PNG and BMP. ⢠Sound: Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI) and monophonic ringing tones If a received message contains any unsupported elements, they may be re placed with the file name and the text Object format not supported Note that you cannot receive any multime dia messages if you have a call in progress, a game or another Java application running, or an active WAP connection over GSM data (see K eying in the servi ce settings manually on page 135 ). Because delivery of multimedia messages can fail for a variety of reasons, do not rely solely upon them for essential commu nications. Writing and sending a multimedi a message To set the settings for multimedia messaging, see Settings for multimedia messages on page 88 . For availability and subscription to the multimedia messaging service, contact your network operator or service provider. 1. Press Menu and select Messages , Multimedia msgs. and Create message .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 75 2. Key in a message, see W riting text on page 44 . You can insert one picture in a multimedia message. To insert a picture, press Options and select Insert image . The list of available folders in the Gallery is shown. Open the desired folder, scroll to the desired picture, press Options and select Insert . The indicator on the header of the message indicates that a picture has been atta ched. To insert a name from contacts, press Options , select More options and Insert contact . Scroll to the desired name, press Options and sel ect Insert contact . To insert a number, press Options , select More options and Insert number . Key in the number or sea rch for it in con tacts and press OK . 3. To view the message before sending it, press Opt ions and select Preview . 4. To send the message, pres s Options and sel ect Send to number (or Send to e- mail ). 5. Enter the recipient â s phone number (or e-mail address) or search for the phone number (or e-mail address) in contacts. Press OK and the message is moved to the Outbox folder for sending. It takes more time to send a mul timedia message than a text message . While the multimedia mes sage is being sent, the anim ated indicator is displ ayed and you can use other functions of the phone. If the re is an interruption, while the message is being sent, the phone tries to resend it a few times. If this fails, the message will rema in in the Outbox folder and you can try to resend it later.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 76 The messages that you have sent will be saved in the Sent items folder if the setting Save sent messages is set to Ye s , see Settings for multimedia messages on page 88 . Reading and repl ying to a multimedi a message When your phone is receiving a mul timedia message, the animat ed indicator is displayed. When the message has been received, the i ndicator and the text Multimedia message received are shown. The blinking indicates that the memory for multimedia messages is full, see Multimedia messages memory full on page 77 . The multimedia message function uses shared me mory, see Shared me mory on page 19 1. Press Show to view the message, or press Exit to view it later. Reading the message later: Press Menu and select Messages , Multimedia msgs. and Inbox . 2. Scroll to view the message. Press Options and some of the following options may be available. ⢠Delete message to delete a saved message. ⢠Reply to reply to the message . To send the reply, press Options and select Send . The sender â s phone number (or e-mail address) is used as the default value. ⢠Forward to no. to forward the message to a phone number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 77 ⢠Edit to edit a message. You can only edit messages you have written. See Writing and sending a mu ltimedia message on page 74 . ⢠Message details to view the subject, size and class of the message. ⢠Details to view the detail s of the attached image or sound ⢠Play to listen to the ringing tone that is contained in the message. ⢠Save sound clip to save a ringing tone in the Gallery . ⢠Save image to save the pi cture in the Gallery . Inbox, Outbox, Sa ved and Sent items fold ers The phone saves the multimedia messages that have been receiv ed in the Inbox folder of the Multimedi a msgs. submenu. Multimedia messages that have not yet been sent are moved to the Outbox folder of the Multimedia msgs. . The multimedia messages that you wish to send later can be saved in the Saved items folder of the Multimedia msgs. submenu. The multimedia messages that have been sent are saved in the Sent items folder of the Multimedia msgs. submenu , if the setting Save sent messages is se t to Yes , see Settings for multimedia messages on page 88 . Multimedia messages memory full When you have a new multimedia message waiting and the memory for the messages is full, the indicator blinks and Multimedia memory full, view waiting msg. is shown. To view the waiting message, press Show . To save the
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 78 message, press Opt ions , s elect Save message and dele te old messages by first selecting the folder and then the message to be deleted. To discard the waiting message, press Exit an d Ye s . If you press No, you can view the message. Deleting messages ⢠To delete text messages, press Menu an d select Messages , Text messages and Delete messages . To delete all t ext messages from all text messag e folders, select All messages and when Delete all messages from all folders? is displayed, press OK . If the folders contain unread messages, the phone will ask whether you want to delete them also. To delete mu ltimedia messa ges, press Menu an d select Messages , Multime dia msgs. and Delete messages . ⢠To delete all messages from a folder, select the folder where you want to delete the messages and press OK to confirm. If the folder contains unread messages, the phone will ask whether you want to delete them also.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 79 E-mail messages Writing and sending an e-mail Note: When sending e mails, your phone m ay display the word s Message se nt . This is an indicati on that the e-mail ha s been sent by your phone to the e-m ail server. This is not an ind ication that the e-mail h as been received at the intended destination. For m ore details about e-mail services, check with your service provider. Before you can send and retrieve any e-mails, you need to do the following: ⢠You need an active e-mail account and e-mail service settings. For the availability of your e-mail account and e-mail service settings, contact your e- mail service provider. ⢠Activate the e-mail service settings that you have obtained from your network operator or e-mail service provider, see Options available for an e-mail application on page 84 . ⢠You also need to set th e e-mail settings on your phone, see E-mail settings on page 82 . You can write your e-mail message before connecting t o the e-mail service, or connect to the service first, and then write and sen d your e-mail. 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Open and Create e-mail . 2. Key in the recipient â s e-mail address, press Options and sele ct Save. Or: Press Options and select Search to search for the e-mail address in contacts and select Save .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 80 3. You can key in the subject for t he e-mail if you want, the n press Options and select Save . 4. Key in the e-mail message, see Writing text on page 44 . The number of characters that you can key in is shown on the top right of the display. 5. To send the e-mail message, press Options and select Send e-mail . Select ⢠Send no w to send the e-mail immediately. If you have not alre ady connected to the e- mail account, your phone establishes the connection first and then sends the e-mail. ⢠Send later to send your e-mail later and the e-mail is saved in the Outbox folder. If you wa nt to edit or continue writing your e-mai l later, you can save it in Drafts by selecting Save draft msg. . Sending the e-mail later: Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Open , Outbox and Send now . Downloading e-mail message s from your e-ma il account The e-mail function uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Open and Retrieve to download e- mail messages that have been sent to your e-mail account. Or: Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Open and Send and retrieve to download new e-mail messages and to send e-mails that have been saved in the Outbox folder. If the message memory is full, delete some or your older messages before you start to download new messages.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 81 2. Your phone makes a connection to the e- mail service. A status bar is shown, while your phone is downloading e-mail messages to your phone. 3. Press Select to view the new message in Inbox , or press Back to view it later. Reading the e-mail later: Press Menu an d select Messages , E-ma il , Open and Inbox . 4. If more than one message is received, select the message that you want to read. An unread text message is indicated by . Replying to an e-mail message 1. While reading or viewing the message, press Options . You can, for example, delete, reply, reply to all, forward or archive the message you are reading. 2. Select Reply to re ply to an e-mail. Select Ori ginal text to include the original message in the reply or select Empty screen . When replying to an e-mail, first confirm or edit the e-mail address and subject, then write your reply. 3. Press Options and select Send e-mail and Send no w to send the message to the displayed number. Inbox, Outbox, Dele ted items, Sent items, Drafts and Archive folders Your phone has the following folders in the E-m ail me nu: ⢠Inbox for saving e-mails that you have downloaded from your e -mail account. ⢠Outbox for saving e-mails that have not been se nt, if you have selected Send later , see Writing and sending an e-mail on page 79 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 82 ⢠Deleted items for e-mails that have bee n deleted. ⢠Sent items for saving e-mails that have been sent. ⢠Drafts for saving unfinished e-mails. ⢠Archive for organising and saving your e-mails. E-mail settings 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Open and Settings . 2. Select Mailbox in use t o v i e w a l i s t o f m a i l b o x e s , t h e n s c r o l l t o t h e o n e t h a t y o u w a n t t o e d i t a n d s e l e c t i t . You have five mailboxes that you can use for the e-mail settings of your phone for saving and retrieving e-mail messages. 3. Select Edit active mailbox and select each of the settings one by one. Key in all the required settings according to the information you have received from your e-mail service provider. ⢠Mailbox name . Key in the name t hat you want to use for the mailbox. ⢠E-mail address . Key in your e-mail address. ⢠My e-mail name . Key in your name or nickname, if you want the recipient to see it. ⢠Outgoing (SMTP) serve r . Key in the mail server address. ⢠Outgoing (SMTP) port . Key in the number of the mail server port for outgoing e-mail. The most common default value is 25.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 83 ⢠Use SMTP authorisation . If your e-mail service provider re quires authentication for sending e-mails, set the setting to on. You must also define your SMTP user name and SMTP password . ⢠SMTP user name . Key in the name that you have obtained from your e- mail service provider to access your mailbox. ⢠SMTP password . Key in the password that you want to use to access your mailbox. If you have not defined a password, you may be asked to define one when your phone connects to your e-mail account. ⢠Include signature . Confirm your selection if you want to add a predefined signature to you r e-mail. ⢠Incoming (POP3/IMAP) server . Key in the e-mail server type for the incoming e-mail (either PO P3 or IMAP4 ) ⢠Incoming (POP3/IMAP) port . Key in the port number that you have obtained from your e-mail service provider. ⢠POP3/IMAP user name Key in the user name. If you have not define d your SMTP user name , the e-mail server uses this user name instead. ⢠POP3/IMAP password . Key in the password. If you h ave not defined your SMTP password , the e-mai l server uses POP3/IMAP password in stead. ⢠Reply-to address . Key in the e-mail address to which you want the replies to be sent, if it differs from your e-mail address. ⢠Incoming server type . Select either POP3 or IMAP4 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 84 ⢠Secure login APOP . Sel ect On if your connection requires a secure login, otherwise leave it to Off . Contact your service provide r if in doubt. This option is shown only, if you have selecte d POP3 as your mailbox type. ⢠Retrieve mails . Select All if you want to retrieve all your e-mails at once or select User defined if y ou want to retrieve on ly some of them at a time. Options available for an e-mail appl ication ⢠Web access to restrict the application for accessing the net work. Select Ask first and the phone will ask you to confirm ne t access, Allowed to allow the net access, or Not allowed not to allow the ne t access. ⢠Service settings to activate the network connection settings for your e-mail function. Select Application to activate the settings that are used for the e- mail function or select Default to confirm that your e-mail function uses the same settings as the WAP browser, see Keying in the servi ce settings manually on page 135 . Contact your e-mail service provider, if in doubt. ⢠Details to give additional information about the application. Chat You can have a conversation with another person using this faster text messaging application. You cannot save received or sent me ssages, but you can view them while chatting. Each chat message is priced as a text message.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 85 1. To start a chat, press Menu , select Messages and Chat . Key in or search in contacts for the phone number of the person with whom you want to chat and press OK . Another way t o start a chat: When you have received a message, press Show to read it. To st art a cha t, pres s Options and select Chat . 2. Key in your nickname for the chat and press OK . 3. Write your chat message, see Writing text on page 44 . 4. To send the message, pres s Options and sel ect Send . 5. The reply message from the other person is shown above your original message. To reply to the message, press OK and repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. To end the chat session, press Opt ions and select Quit . To view the most recent messages of the current chat session, press Options and select Chat history . The messages that you sent are indicated by "<" and your nickname, and the messages that you received are indicated by ">" and the sender â s nickname. Press Back to return to the message you are currently writing. To edit your nickname, select the option Chat name . Voice messages Voice mailbox is a network service and you may need to subscribe to it. For more information and for the voice mailbox numbe r, contact your service provider. Press Menu and select Messages and Voice messages . Select
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 86 ⢠Listen to voice messages to call your voice mailbox at the phone number that you have saved in the V oice mailbox number me nu. Each phone line may have its own voice mailbox number, see Line for outgoing calls on page 97 . ⢠V oice mailbox number to key in, search for or edit your voice mailbox number and press OK t o s a v e i t . If supported by the network, the indicator will show new voice messages. Press Listen to call your voice mailbox number. Tip; Pressing and holding calls your voice mailbox, when the flip is closed. When the flip is open, press and hold t he corresponding number key. Info messages With the info message network service you can receive messages on various topics from your service provider, for example weather or traffic conditions. For available topics and the relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. If the GPRS connection is set t o Always online , the info messages may not be received. In that case, set the GPRS connect ion to When needed , see GPRS connection on page 132 . Message settings The message settings affect the sending, receiv ing and viewing of messages.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 87 Settings f or text message s 1. Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings , Text messages an d Sending profile . 2. If more than one message profile set is supported by your SIM card, select the set you want to cha nge. ⢠Select Message centre numbe r to save the phone number of the message centre that is required for sending text messages. You will receive this number from your service provider. ⢠Select Messages sent as to select the message type: Tex t , E-mail , P aging or Fax . ⢠Select Message validity to select the length of time for which the network should attempt to deliver your message. ⢠For message type Text , select Default recipient number to save a default number for sending messages for this message profile. For message type E-mail , select E-mail server to sa ve the e-mail server number. ⢠Select Delivery reports to ask the network to send delivery reports about your messages (network service). ⢠Select Use GPRS to set GPRS as the preferred SMS bearer. When the se tting is set to on and the GPRS con nection setting is Always online , the phone sends a text message over GPRS connection, if this is possible . See also GPRS on page 132 . ⢠Select Reply via same centre to allow the recipient of your message to send you a reply via your message centre (network service).
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 88 ⢠Select Rename se nding profile to change the name of the sele cted message profile. The message profile sets are only displayed if your SIM card supports more than one set. Overwrite setti ngs When the text me ssage memory is full, th e phone cannot receive or send any new messages. However, you can set the phone to automatically replace old t ext messages in the Inbox an d Sent items folders with the new ones. Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings , Text messages and Overwriting in inbox or Overwriting in se nt items . Sel ect Allo wed to set the phone to replace the old text messages with new ones in the Inbox or the Sent items folder, respectively. Settings f or multimedia messages Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings and Multimedia msgs. . Select ⢠Save sent messages . Select Ye s to set the phone to save sent multimedia messages in the Sent items folder. If you select No , the sent messages are not saved. ⢠Allow multimedia reception . Select No , Ye s or In home network to use the multimedia service . If you sele ct In home network , you cannot receive multimedia messages outside your home network. ⢠Incoming multimedia messages . Sele ct Retrieve to set the phone t o automatically fetch newly received multimedia messages, or select Reject if you do not wish to receive multimedia messages.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 89 ⢠Connection settings . Define WAP connection settings for retrieving multimedia messages. Activate the set where you want to save the connection settings and th en edit the settings. ⢠Settings â name . Key in a new name for the connection set and press OK . ⢠Homepage . Key in the homepage address of the WAP service that you want to use, press for a dot, and press OK . ⢠Session mode . Select Pe r m a n e n t or Temporary . ⢠Data bearer . Select GPRS . ⢠Bearer settings . Select the sett ings for the selected data beare r. ⢠GPRS access point . Key in the access point name to est ablish a connection to a GPRS network and press OK . You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. ⢠IP address . Key in the address, press for a dot, and press OK . You obtain the IP address from your network operator or service provide r. ⢠Authentication type . Select Secure or Normal . ⢠User name . Key in the user name and press OK . ⢠P assword . Key in the password and press OK . ⢠Allow adverts . You can receive or reject advertisement s. To receive the multim edia connecti on settings as a text me ssage You may receive the multimedia connection se ttings as a text message from the network operator or service provider that offers the WAP service you want to use. For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. You can
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 90 also visit Club Nokia â s website (www.club.nokia.com). Availability may vary by country. Font size setting To select the font size for reading and writing messages, press Me nu and sel ect Messages , Message settings , Other settings , and Font size . Service commands Press Menu and select Messages and Service commands . Key in and send service requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your service provider. â Call register (Menu 2) The phone registers the phone numbers of missed, received and dialled calls, and the approximate length and cost of your calls. The phone registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the phone is switched on and within t he network â s service area. When you press Options in the Missed calls , R eceived calls and Dialled numbers menu, you can, for example, view the date and the time of the call, edit or delete the phone number from the list, save the number in contacts, or send a message to the number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 91 Recent calls lists Press Menu and select Call register an d then select ⢠Missed calls to view th e list of the last ten ph one numbers from which somebody has tried to call you (net work service). The number in front of the (name or) phone number indicates the amount of call attempts from that caller. Tip: When a note about missed calls is displayed, press List to access the list of phone numbers. Scroll to the number y ou would like to call back and press . ⢠Received calls to vi ew the list of the last te n phone numbers from which you have most recently accepted calls (network service ). ⢠Dialled numbers to vi ew the list of the last 20 phone numbers that you have most recently called or attempted t o call. See also Last number redialling on page 38 . ⢠Delete recent call lists t o delete the recent calls lists. Select whether you want to delete all the phone numbers in the recent calls lists, or only the numbers in the missed calls, received calls or dialled numbers lists. You cannot undo the operation. Call counters and call timers Note: The actu al invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, dependin g upon netw ork features, rounding-o ff for billing , taxes and so forth.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 92 Press Menu and select Call register an d then select ⢠Call duration . Scroll to view the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls in hours, minutes and seconds. The security code is required to clear the timers. Each phone line has it s own call timers and the timers of the selected l ine are displayed. See Line for outgoing calls on page 97 . ⢠Call costs (network service). Select Last call unit s or All calls â unit s to check the cost of your most recent call or all calls in terms of units specified within the Show costs in function. Select Call cost setti ngs and select Clear counters to clear the cou nters, or select Show costs in to set the phone to show the remaining talk t ime in terms of charging units or units of currency. Contact your service provider for charging unit prices. Select Call cost limit to limit the cost of your calls to a certain amount of charging units or units of currency. The PIN2 code is required for the call cost settings. Note: When no mor e charging units or currency units are left, calls may on ly be possible to the emer gency number program med into your phone (e.g. 112 o r other official emergency number). ⢠GPRS data counter . Scroll to check the size of data that were sent or received in bytes, sent and received data in total, and to clear the counters. The security code is required to clear the counters.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 93 ⢠GPRS connection timer . Scroll to check the duration of the last GPRS connection or the total GPRS connection time. You can also clear the timers. The security code is required to clear the timers. â Profiles (Menu 3) Your phone has a group of profiles that allow you to personalise the tone settings of you r phone and to activate a profile for different events and en vironments. Available profil es are General , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , and Pager . Press Menu and select Profiles . Scroll to a profile and press Select . ⢠To activate the selected profile, select Ac ti va t e . ⢠To set the profile to be active for a certain amount of time up to 24 hours, select Timed and set t he end time. When the ti me set for the profile e xpires, the previous profile that was not timed becomes active. ⢠To personalise the profile, select P ersonalise . Select the setting that you want to change and make the changes. The settings can also be changed in the To ne se t ti ng s menu, see Tone settings on page 102 . In addition you can rename a profile using a Profile name . The General profile cannot be re named.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 94 Tip: To quickly change the profile in standby mode ⢠when the flip is closed, press the power key , scroll to the profile that you want to activate and press Select . ⢠when the flip is open, press the profile key , scroll to the profile that you want to activate and press Select . â Settings (Menu 4) Time and date settings Clock Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Time and date settings and Clock . Select Show clock (or Hide clock ) to show (or hide) the time on the top right of the display in standby mode. Select Set the time to adjust the clock to the correct time, and Time format to select 12-hour or 24-hour time format. The clock is also used for the funct ions Messages , Call register , Alarm clock , timed Profiles , Calendar , screen saver and Notes , for example. If the battery is removed from the phone for a lon g time, you may need to reset the time.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 95 Date Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Time and date settings and Date . Select Show date (or Hide date ) to show (or hide) the date on the display in standby mode. Select Set the date to adjust the da te. You can also sele ct the da te format. Auto update of date and time Press Me nu and select Settings , Time and date settings and Auto-update of date & time (network service). To set the phone to automatically update the time and date according to the current time zone, select On . To set the phone to ask for a confirmation before the update, select Confirm first . The automatic update of date an d time does not change the time you have set for the alarm clock, calendar or the alarm notes. They are in local time. Updating may cause some alarms that you have set t o expire. Call settings Call divert Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and Call divert (network service). With call divert, you can direct your incoming calls to another number, for example, to your voice mailbox number. For details, cont act your service provider. Divert options that are not supported by your SI M card or your network operator may not be shown. Select the divert option that you require, such as Divert if busy to diver t the vo ice calls when your number is busy or when you reject an incoming call.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 96 To set the divert set ting to on, select Activate and then select the timeout aft er which the call is dive rted, if this is available for the call divert option. To set the call divert to off, select Cancel . To check whether the call divert is activated or not, select Check status if this is available for the divert option. Several divert opt ions may be active at the same time. To see the dive rt indicators in standby mode, see Essent ial indicators in standby mode on page 24 . Anykey answer Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and then Anykey answer . Select On and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key, ex cept , selection keys and , and . Automatic redial Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and Automatic redial . Select On and your phone will make a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. Speed dialling Press Menu , select Settings , Call se ttings and Speed dialling . Select On and the names and phone numbers assigned to the speed dialling keys, from to with the flip closed, or the corresponding number keys of the keyboard, can be dialled by pressing and holding the corresponding number key.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 97 Call waiting Press Menu and sele ct Settings , Call settings and Call wait ing . Selec t Act i va te and the network will notify you of an incoming call while you have a call in progress (network service). See Call waiting on page 41 . Summary after call Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and Summary after call . Select On and after each call the phone will briefly display the duration and cost (network service) of the call. Send my call er identity Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and Send my caller identity . Select Ye s and your phone number will be displayed to t he person you are calling (network service). Select Set by network and the set ting agreed upon with your service provider is used. Line for outgo ing calls Line for outgoing calls is a network service to select the phone line 1 or 2, that is the subscriber number, for making calls. Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Call settings and Line for outgoing calls . If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. However, calls on both lines can be answered regardless of the selected line. If supported by your SIM card, you can prevent the line selection by selecting the Lock option.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 98 For more information on availability, contact your network operator or service provider. Tip: In standby mode, you can switch from one line to the other by pressing and holding . Phone sett ings Language Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Phone settings and Language . Select the language for the display texts. If Automatic is selected, the phone selects the language according to the information on the SIM card. Memory status Press Menu , and select Settings , Phone settings and Memory status . Scroll to view the amount of free memory, the total used memory and the used memory for each function. You may also find the memory information in the menu of some functions, for example in th e Gallery menu. Security keyguard When the keypad is locked, appears on top of the display. When you have set the security keyguard setting to On and activated it, t he keypad lock remains active if you open the flip. Note that if you have activated the security keyguard, it does not protect your phone data from PC Suite access. 1. Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Phone settings and Security keyguard .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 99 2. Key in the security code and press OK . The security keyguard code is the same as your security code, see Security se ttings on page 10 4 . 3. Select On , if you want to activate the security keyguard. To activate the security keyguard, press Menu and , when the flip is closed. To deactivate the keyguard, press Unlock and OK , if the flip is open. If the flip is closed, press Unlock and , then key in the security code. Cell info displa y Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Phone settings and Cell info display . Select On to set the phone to indicate when it is use d in a cellular network based on Micro Cellular Network (MCN) technology. If the GPRS connection is set t o Always online , the cell identity may not be received. In that case, set the GPRS connect ion to When needed , see GPRS connection on page 132 . Welcome note Press Menu an d select Settings , Phone settings and Wel c om e n o te . Key in the note that you would like to be shown briefly whe n the phone is switched on. To save the note, press Optio ns , an d select Save . Network sel ection Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Phone settings and Network selection . S elect Automatic and the phone aut omatically selects one of the cellular networks available in your area.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 100 If you select Manual , you can select a network that has a roaming agreement with your home network operator. If No access is displayed, you must select another network. The phone stays in manual mode until the automatic mode is selected or another SIM card is inserted into the phone. Confirm SIM service actions See SIM services (Menu 14) on page 148 . Help text activatio n To set the phone to show or not to show the help texts, press Menu an d select Settings , Phone settings and Help text activation . See also Using the menu on page 58 . Start-up tone To set the phone to play or not to play a start -up tone when the phone is switched on, press Menu and selec t Settings , Phone settings and Start-up tone . Display settings Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background image, known as wallpaper, when the phone is in standby mode. Some images are pre-saved in the Gallery menu. You can also receive images via multimedia messages, download them via the WAP service or use PC Suite from to transfer t hem from your PC and then save them in Gallery . Your phone supports JPEG, GIF, BMP and PNG formats.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 101 To select wallpaper 1. Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Display settings and Wallpaper . 2. Select Change image to view the folder list in the Gallery menu. 3. Open the image folder and scroll to the desire d image 4. To set the image as wallpaper, press Options and select Set as wallpaper Note that the wallpaper is not displayed when the ph one activates the screen saver. To activate or deactiva te the wall paper Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Display settings and Wallpaper . To activate / deactivate the wallpaper, select On / Off respectively. Colour schemes You can change the colour of some display components, for example indicators and signal bars. Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Display settings and Colour schemes . Sel ect the desired colour scheme. Operator logo To set your phone to display or hide the operator logo, press Menu and sel ect Settings , Display settings and Operator logo . If you have not saved any operator logos, the Operator logo menu is dimmed. Note that the operator logo is not displayed when the phone activates the screen saver. For more information on availability of an operator logo via SMS, MMS or WAP, contact your network operator or your WAP servic e provider.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 102 Screen saver A digital clock screen saver is used for power saving in standby mode. It is activated when no function of the phone has been used for a certain time while the phone â s flip is closed. Press any key to de activate the screen saver or open the flip. The screen saver is also deactivated when the phone is out of the network coverage area. Press Menu and select Setti ngs , Display settings and Screen saver timeout . Select the timeout after which the screen saver will be activated. The length of the timeout can vary from 5 seconds to 60 minute s. Note that the screen saver overrides all graphics and texts on the display in standby mode. Display bri ghtness You can change the brightness level of the phone display. Press Menu and select Settings , Display settings and Display brightness . Move the joystick to the left to decrease and to the right to increase the brightness level , and press OK to accept it. Tone settin gs Press Menu and select Setti ngs and Ton e s et t in gs . You can find the same settings in the Profile s menu, see Profiles (Menu 3) on page 93 . Note that the settings you make, will change the settings in the active profile. Select Incoming call alert to choose how the phone notifies you of an incoming voice call. The options are Ringing , As c en di ng , Ring once , Beep once and Off .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 103 Select Ring ing tone for incoming voice calls. To select ringing tones that have been saved in the Gal lery , selec t Open gallery from the ringing tone list. Select Ringing volume and Vibrating alert for incoming voice calls and incoming messages. The vibrating alert does not work whe n the phone is connected to a charger, a desktop stand, or a car kit. Tip: If you donwload a ringing tone or receive one via OTA, you can save it in the Gallery . Select Message alert to ne to set the alert tone for incoming messages, Keypad tones , or Warning tones to set the pho ne to sound tones for example whe n the battery is running out of power. Select Alert for to set the phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected caller group. Scroll to the caller group that you want or All calls and press Mark . Accessory settings Accessory settings menu is only shown if the phone is or has been connect ed to one of the following accessories: headsets HDB-4 or HDS-3, handsfree unit CARK126 or mobile inductive loopset LPS-4. Press Menu and select Setti ngs and A ccessory settings . You can select Headset , Handsfree or Loopset if the corresponding accessory is or has been connected to the phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 104 ⢠Select Default profile to select the profile that you want to be au tomatically activated when you connect to the selected acce ssory. You can select another profile while the accessory is connected. ⢠Select Automatic answer to set the phone to automaticallt answer an incoming call after five seconds. If the Incoming call alert is set to B eep once or Off , automatic answer will not be used. ⢠Select Lights to set the ligh ts permanently to On . Select Automatic to set the lights on for 15 seconds aft er a keypress. The Lights option is available only when Handsfree is sele cted. Security settings Note: When security features that restrict calls are in u se (call barring, close d user group and fixed dialling), cal ls may be possibl e to certain emerge ncy numbers in some networks (e. g. 112 or other o fficial emergency numbers). Press Menu and select Setti ngs and Security settings . Select ⢠PIN code request to se t the phone to ask for your PIN code every time the phone is switched on. Some SIM cards do not allow the PIN code request t o be turned off. ⢠Call barring service (network service) to restrict incoming calls to and outgoing calls from your phone. A barring password is required. ⢠Fixed dialling to re strict your outgoing calls and text messages to selected phone numbers if this function is supported by your SI M card. The PIN2 code is required.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 105 When the fixed dialling is on, GPRS connect ions are not possible except whi le sending text messages over a GPRS connection. In this case, t he recipient â s phone number and th e message centre number must be included in th e fixed dialling list. ⢠Closed user group . Closed user group is a ne twork service that specifies the group of people whom you can call and who can call you. For more information contact your network operator or service provide r. ⢠Security level . Select Phone and the phone will ask for t he security code whenever a new SIM card is inserted into the phone. Select Memory to set t he phone to request the securit y code when the SIM card â s memory is selected and you want to change the memory in use, see Selecting settings for contacts on page 50 or copy from one memory to another, Copying contacts on page 54 . ⢠Access codes to change the security code, PIN code, PIN2 code or barring password. Codes can only include numbers from 0 to 9. Restore factory s ettings To reset the menu settings to their original values, press Menu and select Settings and Restore factory settings . Key in the se curity code and press OK . Note that the data you have keyed in or downloaded, for ex ample the names and phone numbers saved in contacts, are not dele ted.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 106 â Organiser (Menu 5) Alarm clock The alarm clock uses the time format that has been set for the clock. The alarm clock works even when the phone is switched off. Press Menu and select Organiser and Alarm clock . ⢠Select Alarm time , key in the alarm time and press OK . To change the alarm time, sele ct On . ⢠Select Alarm t one and you can select a default alarm tone, personalise your alarm tone by selecting one from a ringing tone list or from the gallery, or set the radio as your alarm tone. If you select the radio as an ala rm tone, your phone plays the las t radio channel that you have listened to via loudspeaker. If the headset is removed, the default alarm tone will be used instead of the radio. When the alarm time expires The phone will sound an aler t tone, and flash Alarm! and the current time on the display. Press Stop to stop the alarm. If you let the alarm continue for a minute or if you press Snooze , the alarm stops for about ten minutes and then resumes. If the alarm time is rea ched while the phone is switche d off, the phone switches itsel f on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you press Stop , the phone asks whether you want to activate the phone for calls, Switch the phone on? . P ress No to switch of f the phone or Ye s to make and receive cal ls.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 107 Note: Do not press Ye s wh en wireless phone use i s prohibited or w hen it may cause interference or danger. Calendar The calendar helps you to keep track of reminders, calls that you ne ed to make, meetings, and birthdays. The calendar uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . Press Menu and select Organiser and Calendar . Tip: To quickly view the current Calendar month, move the joystick to the right in standby mode. Scroll to the day you want. The current day is indicated by a frame around the day. If there are any notes se t for the day, the day is in bold type. To view the notes for the day, press Options and select Day notes . To view a si ngle no te, scrol l to the no te that yo u want to v iew, press Options and select View . The note view allows you to view the details of the selected note. You can scroll through t he note. The other options for the calend ar views may include: ⢠Options for making a note, or for sending a note via IR, or as a note directly to another phone â s calendar or as a text message. ⢠Options for deleting, editing, moving and repeating a not e and for copying a note to another day. ⢠Settings to set the date, time, date or time format, or the first day of the week. In the Auto-d elete option you can set the phone to automaticallt delete old
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 108 notes after a specified time. However, the repeated notes, for example birthday notes, will not be deleted. Making a calend ar note For keying in letters and numbers, see Writing text on page 44 . Press Menu and select Organiser and Calendar or move the joystick to the right in standby mode to go to the monthly view. Scroll to the date that you want, press Options and select Make a note . Select one of the following note types: ⢠Meeting - Key in the note, press Options and select Save (or search for the name in contacts and press OK ). Key in the location of the meeting, press Options and select Save . Key in the start time for the meeting and press OK , and then key in the end time and press OK . To set the alarm for the note, select With to ne or Silent (no alarm tone ) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Call - Key in the phone number, press Options and sele ct Save . Key in the name, press Options and select Save . (Instead of keying in the phone number, you can search for the name and number in contacts). Then key in the time for the call and press OK . To set the alarm for the note, select With tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Birt hday - Key in the person â s name (or press Op tions and search for it in contacts an d press OK ), press Options and select Save . Then key in the year of birth, and press OK . To set the alarm for the note , select With tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Memo - Key in the note, press Options and select Save (or search for the name in contacts and press OK). Key in the end day for the note and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 109 To set the alarm for th e note, select With tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Reminder - Key in the subject for the reminder, press Options and select Save (or search for the name in contacts and press OK ). To set the alarm for th e note, select Alarm on and then set the alarm time. When you have set the alarm, the indicator is displayed when you view the notes. When the pho ne sounds an alarm fo r a note The phone beeps, and displays the note. Wheh a call note indicator is shown on the display, you can call the displayed number by pre ssing . To stop the alarm and view the note, press View . To stop the alarm without viewing the note, press Exit . To-do list You can save a note for a task that you have to do, se lect a priority level for the note and mark it as done when you have completed it. You can sort the notes by priority or by date. The to-do list uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . Press Menu and select Organiser and To-do list to view the list of notes. Press Options or scroll to the desired note and then press Options . ⢠To add a new note, select Add . Key in the subject for the note. When you have keyed in the maximum number of characters for a note, no further characters will be accepted. Press Options and select Save . Select the priority for the note
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 110 High , Medium or Low . The phone aut omatically sets the time of expiry without an alarm for the note. For Dictionary , see Setting predictive text input on or off on page 46 . ⢠You can also view and delete the selected note and dele te all the notes that you have marked as completed. You can sort the notes by priority, send them to another phone, save them as a calendar note, or access the calendar. While viewing a note, you can also select an option to edit the selected note, edit the deadline or priority for th e note, or mark the note as completed. â Notes (Menu 6) Note: Your phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do not switc h the phone on when wireless phone use is proh ibited or when it may cause interferen ce or danger. You can use t he Notes application for writing and sending notes via IR, SMS or MMS. The Notes application uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . 1. To access Notes , press Menu and select Notes or type any character when the messaging keyboard is open. The phone will ask you to set the date and time, if they have not already be en set when you start to write a note. 2. Press Options and select Make a note , see Writ ing text on page 44 . 3. Key in the note a nd select Save .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 111 You can insert the current time and date to the note. If there is not e nough space to insert t hem to the note, the phone will ask you to delet e the appropriate number of characters from your note. You can also send the note via IR, MMS, or as a text message (SMS). If the note is too long to be sent as a text message, the phone will ask you to delete the appropiate number of characters from your note . The other options for notes include options for viewing, de leting, and editing a note. While editing a n ote, you can also exit the text editor without saving the changes. â Radio (Menu 7) Note: Your phone must be switched on to use th is function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phon e use is prohibited or when it may cause interferen ce or danger. To listen to the radio on your phone, conne ct the headset HDS-3 (stereo) or HDB-4 (mono) to the headset connector on the bottom of the phone. The lead of the headset functions as th e radio antenna, so let it han g freely. Note that the quality of the radio broadcast depends on the radio station â s coverage in that parti cular area. 1. To turn on the radio, pre ss Menu an d select Radio . The following are shown on the display: ⢠The channel location number and the name of the radio channel.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 112 ⢠The frequency of the radio channel. 2. If you have pre-saved radio channels, you can scroll to the channe l that you would like to listen to, or select a radio channel location from 1 to 9 by pressing the corresponding number key. When using the hea dset HDB-4 or HDS-3, press the headset key to scroll to the desired saved radio channel that you have saved. 3. When the radio is on, press Options and selec t Switch off to turn off the radio. Tip: To return to standby mode, press briefly; to quickly turn off the radio, press and hold . Tuning a radio ch annel When the radio is on, move the joystick up or down to start the channel search. Searching stops when a channel has been found. To save the channel, press Options , and select Save channel . Key in the name of the channel and press OK . Select the location where you want to save the channel. Tip: To quickly save the channel in locations 1 to 9, press and hold the corresponding number key, then key in the name of the channel and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 113 Using the radio When the radio is on, press Options and select ⢠Switch off to turn off the radio. ⢠Save channel to save the radio channel that you have found, refer to T uning a radio channel above. Up to 20 radio channe ls can be saved. ⢠Automatic tuning . Move t he joystick up or down to start searching upwards or downwards for channels. The search stops when a channel has been found, press OK . To save the channel, see Save channel above. ⢠Manual tuning . Move the joystick up or down to start searching upwards or downwards for channels, or hold the joystick in the up or down position to search for channels more quickly. To save the channel, press OK an d see Save channel above. Tip: To quickly select Manual tuning , press when in the Radio menu. ⢠Set frequency . If you know the frequency of the radio channel to which you would like to listen (bet ween 87.5 MHz and 108.0 MHz), key it in and press OK . To save the ch annel, see the Save channel option. Tip: To quickly select Se t frequency , press when in the Radio menu. ⢠Delete channel . To delete a saved channel, scroll to the desired channel, select Delete and OK . ⢠Rename . Key in a new name for the saved channel and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 114 ⢠Loudspeaker (or Headset ) to listen to the radio through a loudspeaker (or headset). Keep the h eadset connected to the ph one, because the lead of the headset functions as th e radio antenna. Note that i f you receive an incomin g call, it is always routed to the headset. ⢠Mono output (or Stereo o utput ) to listen to the radio in mono (or in ste reo). You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio, the radio is muted. When you end the call, the radio will automatically be turned back on. You can also use other functions of the phone, for example, write me ssages or play games, while listening to the radio. When an application using a GPRS or HSCSD connection is sending or receiving data, it may interfere with the radio. â Gallery (Menu 8) Note: Your p hone must be swi tched on to us e this function. D o not switch the phone on w hen wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. You can save images and ringing tones, for example, that have been received in multimeadia messages, in the folders of the gallery, see Reading and replying to a multimedia message on page 76 . The gallery uses shared me mory, see Shared me mory on page 19 . 1. Press Menu and select Gallery . The list of options is shown. 2. Select View folders to ope n the list of folders.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 115 Other available options are: ⢠Add folder to add a new folder. Key in a name for the folder and press OK . ⢠Delete folder to select a folder you want to delete. You cannot delete the folders that were originally on the phone. ⢠Rename folder to select a folder you want to rename. You cannot rename the folders that were originally on the phone. ⢠Gallery downloads to download more images and tones. Select Image downloads or Tone do wnloads . The list of available WAP bookmarks is shown. Select More bookmarks to access the li st of WAP bookmarks in the Services menu, se e Bookmarks on page 142 . Select the appropriate bookmark to connect to the desired WAP site. If the connection fails, you may not be able to access the WAP page from the WAP service whose conne ction settings are currently active. In this case, enter the Services menu and activate another set of service settings, see Connecting to a WAP service on page 138 . Try again t o connec t to the WAP site. For the availability of different WAP services, pricing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the WAP servic e provider. 3. Open the desired folder an d the list of files in the folder is shown. Graphics and Ton e s are the origi nal folders in the phon e. 4. Scroll to the desired file. Press Options and some of the following options are available: ⢠Open to open the selected file.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 116 ⢠Delete to delete th e selected file. ⢠Move to move a file to another folder. ⢠Rename to give a ne w name to the file. ⢠Set as wallpaper to set the selected file as wallpape r. ⢠Set as ring tone to set th e selected file as the ringing tone. ⢠Details to see the det ails of the file, for example, the si ze of the file. ⢠Sort to sort the files and folders by date, type, name or size. â Games (Menu 9) Note: Your phone must be switched on to use t his function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interferen ce or danger. Launching a gam e 1. Press Menu and select Games and Se lect game . 2. Scroll to a game or a game set (the name depends on the game). 3. Press Options and select Open or press . If the selection is a single game, it will be lau nched. Otherwise, a list of games in the selected game set is displayed. To launch a single game, scroll to the desired game and press Options and sele ct Open , or press .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 117 Note that running some games may consume the phone âÂÂs batt ery faster (and you may need to connect the phone to the charger). Other options available for a game o r game set For Options for games, see Other options available for an application or application set on page 11 9 . Game downloads Press Menu and select Games and Game downloads . The list of available WAP bookmarks is shown. Select More bookmarks to access the list of WAP bookmarks in the Se rvices menu, see Bookmarks on page 142 . Select the appropriate bookmark to connect to t he desired WAP site. If the connection fails, you may not be able to access the WAP site from the WAP service whose connection settings are currently active. In this case, enter the Services menu and activate another set of service settings, see Connec ting to a W AP service on 138 . Try again to connect to the WAP site. For the availability of different WAP services, pricing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the WAP service provider. Note that when downloading a game or an application, it may be saved in the Applications menu inste ad of the Games menu.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 118 Memory stat us for games To view the amount of memory available for game and application installations, press Menu and select Games and Memory . See also Memory status for applications on page 12 1 . The games use shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . Game settings Press Menu and sel ect Games and Settings to set sounds, lights and shakes for the game. â Applications (Menu 1 0) Note: T h e p h o n e m u s t b e s w i t c h e d o n t o u s e t h i s f u n c t i o n . D o not switch on the phone when the use of a wireless p hone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or d anger. This menu allows you to manage Java applications installed on your phone. Your phone software includes some Java applications that were specially designed for this Nokia phone. Various service providers offer other applications via WAP services or they can be downloa ded to your phone f rom a PC using a da ta cable or an IR connection. Before you can use any of these applications you have to download them onto your phone .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 119 Launching an application 1. Press Menu and select Applications and Select application . 2. Scroll to an application or an application set (the name depends on the application). 3. Press Options and select Open or press . If the selection is a single application, it will be launched. Otherwise, a list of appli cations in the selected appl ication set is displayed. To launch a single application, scroll to the desired application and press Options and select Open or press , Note that running some applications may consume the phone â s battery faster (and you may need to con nect the phone to the ch arger). Other options available for an a pplication or app lication set ⢠Delete to delete the application or application set from your phone. Note that if you delete a pre-installed application or an application set from your phone, you may download it again to your phone from the Nokia Software Market, www.softwaremarket.nokia.c om/wap or www.softwaremarket.nokia.com/6800. ⢠Web access to restrict the application from accessing the net work. Select Ask first and the phone will ask you for net access, Allo wed to allow the net access, or Not allowed not to allow the ne t access. ⢠Update version to check if a new version of the application is availa ble for download from the WAP services.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 120 ⢠Web page to provide further information or additional data for the application from an Internet page. This is a network service and the me nu is shown only if an Internet address has been provided with the application. ⢠Details to give additional information about the application. Downloading an application You can download new Java applications in different ways: ⢠Press Menu and select Applications and App. downloads and the list of available WAP bookmarks is shown. Select More bookmarks to access the list of WAP bookmarks in the Services me nu, see Bookmarks on page 142 . Select the appropriate bookmark to connect to t he desired WAP site. If the connection fails, you may not be able to access the WAP page from t he WAP service whose connection settings are currently acti ve. In this case, enter the Services menu and act ivate another set of service settings, see Connecting to a WAP service on 138 . Try again to connect to the WAP site. For the availability of different WAP services, pricing and tariffs, c ontact your network operator and/or the WAP service provider. ⢠Press Menu and select Services to find a WAP page to download an appropriate Java application, see Browsing the pages of a WA P service on page 139 . ⢠Use the game download function, see Game do wnloads on page 11 7 . ⢠Use the Nokia Application installer from PC Suite to download the applications to your phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 121 Note that Noki a does not warran t for application s from non-No kia sites. If you choose to dow nload Java applicatio ns from them, you should take th e same precautions, f or security or content, as you would with any site. Note that when downloading a game or an application, it may be saved in the Games menu instead of the Applications menu. Memory stat us for applica tions To view the amount of memory available for game and application installations, press Menu and select Applications and Memory . The applications use sh ared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . â Extras (Menu 1 1) Note: Your phone must be switched o n to use the fu nctions in Extras menu. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it ma y cause interference or da nger. Calculator The calculator in your phone adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, calculates the square and the square root, and converts currency values. This calculator has a limited accuracy and rounding er rors may occur, espe cially in long divisions. 1. Press Menu and select Extras an d Calculator .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 122 2. When â 0â is displayed on the screen, key in the first number of the calculation, press for a decimal point or the corresponding symbol on the keyboard, if the flip is open. 3. Press Options and select Add , Subtract , Multiply , Divide , Square , Square root or Change sign . If the flip is open, you can also use the corresponding calculation symbols of the keyboard, if available. Tip: Alternatively, press once to add, twice to subtract, thre e times to multiply or four times to divide , if you use the calculator with the flip closed. 4. Key in the second number. 5. For the total, press Options and select Equals . Repeat steps 3 to 5 as many times as is necessary. 6. To start a new calculation, first press and hold Clear . Perfoming a currency conversion 1. Press Menu and select Extras an d Calculator . 2. To save the exchange rate, press Options and select Exchange rate . Selec t either of the displayed options. Key in the ex change rate, press for a decimal point, and press OK . The exchange rate remai ns in the memory until you replace it with another one. 3. To perform the currency conversion, key in the amount to be converted, pre ss Options and select In domestic or In foreign .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 123 You can also perform the currency conversion in standby mode. Key in the amount to be converted, press Options and select In domest ic or In foreign . Wallet In Wa lle t you can save personal information, such as credit card numbers and make purchases using your phone. You can access wallet via the Wa l le t menu or via t he WAP browser, see Options while browsing on page 139 . When you access the wallet for the first time, you ne ed to create your own wallet code. At Create wallet code: key in the code and press OK to confirm it and at V erify wallet code: key in the code again and press OK . If you want to delete all the contents of the wallet and the wall et code, key in *#7370925538# (or *#res0 wallet# in letters) in stan dby mode. You also need the phone â s security code, see also Access codes on page 14 . Saving and changi ng personal card inf ormation To access the wallet, press Menu , select Extras and Wal let . If required, key in your wallet code and press OK . Select Cards to view the list of cards and scroll to the desired card. The maximum number of cards is five. ⢠To save information on a card, press Options and select View . Select ⢠Card info to key in, for exam ple, the card holder â s name, card type, number and expiry information. ⢠User info to save the user name and password.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 124 ⢠Shipping info to save your contact information. ⢠Billing info to save the contact information in case the invoicing address differs from your own, for example with company credit cards. ⢠Receipt info to save phone numbers and e-mail addresses to which you want the service provider to send a receipt of y our purchase. ⢠To make a copy of the card, press Options and select Copy card . ⢠To delete all the informat ion on the card, press Option s and sele ct Clear card . ⢠To rename the card, press Options and select Rename card . Personal note s You can save up to 30 personal notes, for example passwords, codes or notations. Press Menu , select Extr as , Wa l le t and Personal notes . Press Options and you can view, add, edit a selected note and sort notes either by name or date. Send as te xt copies the note as a text message. Copy to calendar copies the note to the calendar as a memo. Use number extracts numbers from a note. Wallet settings Press Menu , select Extr as , Wa l le t and Settings . Select ⢠Code request to set the wallet code request to on or off. You need to key in the correct wallet code before you can set the code request to on or off. ⢠Change code to change the wallet code.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 125 Guidelines for paying for your purchases with wallet 1. Access the desired WAP site to do shoppings, se e Connecting t o a W AP service on page 138 , and choose the product you want to buy. 2. To pay for your purchases, press Options and select Use wall et info , see Options while browsing on page 139 . 3. Select the card with which you want to pay. Fill in the data form you receive from the service provider by transferring the credit card details from the wallet. If you want to fill in all the fields automatically, select Fill in all fields . The option is shown only when the WAP service supports the Electronic Commerce Modeling Language standard. You can also fill in the form by selecting information fields from the card one by one. The phone displays the completed form. 4. Approve the purchase and the information is forwarded. 5. You may receive a sign-in document from t he WAP service that you must sign in to make the purchase binding, see Digital signature on page 147 . 6. To clo se the wallet , select Close wallet . See Options while browsing on page 139 . Synchronisation You can save your calendar and contacts data on a re mote Internet server or on a compatible PC. If you have saved da ta on the remote Internet server, you can synchronise your phone by starting the synchronisation from your phone. You can also synchronise the data in your phone â s contact s and calendar to correspond with the data on your PC by starting the synchronisation from your PC.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 126 Note that answering an incoming call during synch ronisation will end the synchronisation process and you will need to start it again. Synchronisin g from your ph one Before synchronising from your phone, you may need to do the following: ⢠Subscribe to a synchronisation service. For more information on availability and the synchronisation service settings, contact your network operator or service provider. ⢠Obtain the synchronisation se ttings from your network operator or servi ce provider. You may receive the synchronisation settings as a text messa ge, see Saving the synchronisation settings received as a text message on page 127 or you may have to key in the sett ings manually, see Keying in the synchronisation se ttings manually on page 127 . To start the synchronisation from your phone: 1. Press Menu and select Services , Active service settings and select the connection setti ngs that you need for synchronisation. The synchronisation settings may differ fr om the service settings that are required for WAP browsing. After synchronising, change your Ac ti ve se r vi ce settings back to the previous ones if you want to use other WAP services later. 2. Mark the data that are going to be synchronised. See Data to b e synchr onised in Keying in the synchronisatio n settings manuall y on page 127 . 3. Press Menu and select Extras , Synchronisation and Synchronise .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 127 4. The marked data in the active set will be synchronised after confirmation. Note that synchronising for the first time may take time up to 30 minutes, if contacts or calendar are full. Saving the synchronisation settings received as a text message When you recei ve the synchron isation settings as a text message, Synchronisation settings received is displayed. Press Options and select Detail s to view the received settings first, Save to save the synchronisation settings, or Discard to discard them. Keying in the synchronisation settings manually Press Menu select Extr as , Synchronisation and Settings . Select Active Internet sync. sett ings . You need to activate the se t where you want to save the synchronisat ion settings. A set is a collection of se ttings required to make a connection to a service. Scroll to the set that you want to activate and press Activate . Select Edit active Interne t sync. settings . Select each setting one by one and key in all the required sett ings. ⢠Settings â name . Key in the name for the set and press OK . ⢠Data to be synchronised . Mark the data that you want to synchronise, Contacts and/or Calendar , and press Done . ⢠Database addresses . Select Contacts database and/or Calendar database to be edited. Key in the name of the database and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 128 ⢠User name . Key in the user name and press OK . ⢠P assword . Key in the password and press OK . ⢠Synchronisation server . Key in the name of the server and press OK . Synchronising from your PC To synchronise contacts and calendar from your PC, use either an IR connection or a data cable. You will also ne ed the PC Suite software of your phone installed on your PC. Start the synchronisation from your PC using PC suite. After synchronising, the data on the phone and on the PC are the same. Countdown timer Press Menu and select Extras an d Countdown timer . Key in the alarm time in hours and minutes and press OK . If you wish, write a text note which will be displayed when the time expires, and press OK to start the countdown timer. ⢠To change the countdown time, select Change time , or to stop the timer, select Stop timer . If the alarm time is reached when the phone is in standby mode, the phone sounds a tone and flashes the note text if it is set or el se Countdown time up . Stop the alarm by pressing any key. If no key is pressed, the alarm stops automatically within 30 seconds. To stop the alarm and to delete the te xt note, press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 129 Stopwatch You can measure time, record intermediate times or lap times using the stopwatch. During timing, the other functions of the phone can be used. To set the stopwatch to run in the background, press . Note: Using the stopwatch consumes the battery and the phon e â s operating time will be reduc ed. Be careful not to let it r un in the b ackground when pe rforming other operati ons with your ph one. Timing and split timing 1. Press Menu , select Extras , Stopwatch and Split timing . You can select Cont inue if you have set the stopwatch to run in the background. 2. Press Start to start timing. Press Split every time you want to record an intermediate time. The intermedi ate times are listed below the running time on the display. Scroll to view th e times. 3. Press Stop to stop timin g. 4. Press Options and select Start to start the timi ng again. The new time i s added to the previous one. Save to save the time. Key in a name for the measured time and press OK . If no name is keyed in, the total time is used as the title. Reset to reset the time without saving it.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 130 Lap timin g Press Menu , select Extr as , Stopwatch and Lap timing . Press Start to start timing and Lap to record a lap time. Press Stop to stop the lap timing. Press Option s and you can save or reset the lap t imes. Refer to Timing and split timing above. Viewing and deleting t imes Press Menu , select Extr as , and Stopwatch . If the stopwatch has not been reset, you can select Show last to view the most recent measured time. Select View times and a list of names or final times of the time sets is shown, select the t ime set that you want to view. To delete the saved ti mes, select Delete times . Select Delete all and press OK , or select One by one , scroll to the times th at you want to del ete, press Delete and press OK . â Connectivity (Menu 12) Infrared You can set up the ph one to receive data through i ts infrared (IR) port. To use an IR connection, the device with which you want to establish a connection must be IrDA compliant. You can send or receive data such as business cards and calendar notes to or from a compatible phone or data device (for example a computer) via the IR port of your phone. Do not poin t the IR (i nfrared ) beam at an yone â s eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 Laser product.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 131 Note: Y o u r p h o n e m u s t b e s w i t c h e d o n t o u s e t h i s f u n c t i o n . D o n o t s w i t c h t h e phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Sending and receiving data via IR ⢠Ensure that the IR ports of the sending and receiving devices are pointing at each other and that there are no obstructions between the devices. The preferable distance between the two devices in an infrared connection should be one meter at most. ⢠To activate the IR port of your phone to receive data via IR, press Menu and select Co nnectivity and Infrared . ⢠The user of the sending phone select s the desired IR function to start data transfer. If the data transfer is not started within two minutes after the activati on of the IR port, the connection is cancelled and has to be started again. IR connection indicator ⢠When is shown continuously, the IR connection is activated and your phone is ready to send or receive data via its IR port. ⢠When blinks, your phone is trying to connect to the other device or a connection has bee n lost. Note that the IR connection deactivates automatically.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 132 GPRS GPRS connecti on You can set the phone to automatically register to a G PRS network when you switch the phone on. Press Menu and select Connect ivity , GPRS , GPRS connection and Always online . When you start an appl ication using GPRS, the connection between the phone and the network is established, and data transfer is possible. When you end the application, the GPRS connection ends but the registration with the GPRS network remai ns. If you select When needed , the GPRS registration and connection are established when required by an application using GPRS and closed when you end the application. When the GPRS connection is established, the indicator is shown on the top left of the display. If you re ceive a call or a text message, or make a call during a GPRS connection, the indicator will be shown on the top right of the display to indicate that the GPRS connection has been suspe nded (on hold). GPRS modem sett ings You can connect the phone via an infrared or a data cable connection to a compatible PC and use the phone as a modem t o enable GPRS connectivity from the PC. Press Menu and select Connectivity , GPRS and GPRS modem settings . Select Active access point and activate the access point that you want to use. Select Edit active access point to change the access point sett ings.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 133 ⢠Scroll to Alias for access point and press Select . Key in the name that you would like for the activated access point and press OK . ⢠Scroll to GPRS access point and press Select . Key in the Access Point Name (APN) and press OK . An access point name is n eeded to establish a connection to a GPRS network. You can obtain the Access Point Name from your network operator or service provider. You can also set the GPRS dial-up service settings (Access Point Name) on your PC using the Nokia Modem Options software, see PC Suite on page 149 . If you have set the settings on both your PC and on your phone, note that the PC â s settings will be used. â WA P services (Menu 13) Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this func tion. Do not switch th e phone on when wireless phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause interferen ce or danger. You can access various WAP services such as banking, news, weather reports and entertainment. These servi ces are specially designed for mobile phones and they are maintained by WAP service providers. Check the availability of WAP services, pricing and tariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose service you wish to use. Se rvice providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 134 The WAP services use Wireless Mark-Up Language (WML) on their WAP pages. Internet web pages cannot be viewed on your phone. Basic steps fo r accessing and us ing WAP services 1. Save the service settin gs that are required to access t he WAP service that you want to use. See page 134 . 2. Make a connection to the given WAP service. See page 138 . 3. Start browsing the pages of the WAP servic e. See page 139 . 4. Once you are fini shed browsing, end the connection to the WAP service. See page 14 1 . Setting up the phone for a WAP service You may receive the service settings as a text message from the network operator or service provider that offers the WAP service that you want to use. For more information, contact your network operator or service provider, or visit Club Nokia â s website (www.club.nokia.com). You can also key in the settings manually or add and edit the settings using PC Suite. For the appropriate settings, contact your network operator or service provider. The WAP settings may be available, for ex ample, on their website. Saving the service settings received as a text message When you receive t he service settings as a tex t message, Service settings received is displayed.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 135 ⢠To save the received settings, press Options and select Save . If no settings are saved in Active service settings , the settings are saved in the first free connection set and are also activated. If there are settings save d in Active service settings , Activate saved service settings? will be displayed. To activate the saved settings, press Ye s , or to save them only, press No . ⢠To discard the received settings, press Options and sel ect Discard . ⢠To view the recei ved settings first, pr ess Options and select View . To save the settings, press Save . Keying in the service settings manually 1. Press Menu and select Services , Settings and Connection settings . 2. Select Active service setti ngs . You need to ac tivate the set where you want to save the se rvice settings. A set is a collection of settings required to make a connection to a WAP service. 3. Scroll to the set you wou ld like to activate and pre ss Activate . 4. Select Edi t active service settings . Select each of the sett ings one by one and key in all t he required settings. ⢠Setting â s name - Key in the new name for the connection set and press OK . ⢠Homepage - Key in the home page address of the WAP service that you want to use, press for a dot, and press OK . ⢠Session mode - Select Pe r m a n e n t or Temporary .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 136 ⢠Connection security - Select On or Off . When the connect ion security is On , the phone tries to use a secure connection with the WAP service. If a secure connection is not available, the connection will not be made. If you wish to connect anyway, with a non-secure connection, you must set t he connection security to Off . ⢠Data bearer - Select GMS data or GPRS . ⢠Bearer settings - Settings for th e selected bearer , see Settings when GSM data is the selected data bearer and Settings when GPRS is the selected data bearer below. For pricing, connection speed and other information, contact your network operator or service provider. Settings when GSM data is the selected data bearer ⢠Dial-up number - Key in the phone number and press OK . ⢠IP address - Key in the address, press for a dot, and press OK . You obtain the IP address from your network operator or service provider. ⢠Authentication type - Select Secure or Normal . ⢠Data call type - Select Analogue or ISDN . ⢠Data call speed - Select the speed you want to use, or select Automatic . Automatic is av ailable only if t he current selected data call type is Analogue . The actual data call speed depends on the service provider. ⢠Login type - Select Manual or Auto matic .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 137 ⢠User name - Key in the user name and press OK . ⢠P assword - Key in the password and press OK . ⢠Display terminal window - Select Ye s , if you want the server to perform user authentication when you access intranet sites during a dial-up connection. Settings when GPRS is the selected data bearer ⢠GPRS access point - Key in the access point name and press OK . An access point name is n eeded to establish a connection to a GPRS network. You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. ⢠IP address - Key in the address, press for a dot, and press OK . You obtain the IP address from your network operator or service provider. ⢠Authentication type - Select Secure or Normal . ⢠Login type - Select Manual or Auto matic . If you select Automatic , the login type uses the user name and password keyed in the following settings. If you select Manual , the login information is required each time when establi shing a connection. ⢠User name - Key in the user name and press OK . ⢠P assword - Key in the password and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 138 Connecting to a WAP service Firstly, make sure that the service sett ings of the WAP service that you want to use have been activate d. To activate the settin gs: ⢠Press Menu and select Services , Settings and Connection settings . Select Active service settings and scroll to the set you want to activate and press Activate . Secondly, make a connection to the WAP service. T here are three ways to connect: ⢠Open the homepage of the WAP service: Press Menu and select Services an d Home . Tip: To quickly open the home page of a WAP service when the flip is closed, press and hold in standby mode. When the flip is open, press the corresponding number key. Or: ⢠Select a bookmark of the WAP service: Press Menu and select Services , Bookmarks , and select a bookmar k. If the bookmark does not work with the current active service sett ings, activate another set of service settings and try again. Or: ⢠Key in the address of the WAP service: Press Menu and select Services and then Go to address . Key in the address of the WAP service, press for special characters (or if the flip is open), and press OK .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 139 Note that it is not n ecessary to add the prefix http:/ / in front of the address since it will be added automatically. Browsing the pages of a WAP service After you have made a connection to the WAP service, you can start browsing its WAP pages. The function of the phone keys may vary in different WAP services. Follow the text guides on the phone display. For more information, contact your WAP service provider. Note that if GPRS is selected as the data bearer, the indicator is shown on the top left of the display during browsing. If you receive a call or a tex t message, or make a call during a GPRS connection, the indicator will be shown on the top right of the display to indicate that the GPRS connect ion has been suspended (on hold). Using the phone keys while browsing ⢠Move the joystick up or down to browse through the WAP page. ⢠To select a highlighted item, press . ⢠To enter letters and n umbers, press the keys - and to enter special characters, press the key . When t he flip of your phone is open, you can key in letters and numbers normally. Options while b rowsing Press Options and select one of the options available. The service provider may also offer other options. Select
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 140 ⢠Home to return to the homepage of the WAP service. ⢠Bookmarks . See page 142 . ⢠Call , Edit , Open row , Ope n , Open list to call, to key in text or to select a highlighted item on the WAP page. ⢠Add bookmark to save the WAP page as a bookmark. ⢠View image or View images to view images and animations from the WAP page. ⢠Go to address to key in the address of the WAP service you want t o access. ⢠Service inbox . See page 143 . ⢠Use wallet info and Close wallet . See Guidelines for paying for your purchases with wallet on page 125 . ⢠Appear . settings . See Appearance settings of the WAP browser on page 14 1 . ⢠Cookies . See page 147 . ⢠Use detail to copy a number from t he WAP page for saving or making a call. If the WAP page contains several numbers, you can select the desired one. ⢠Reload to reload and update the current WAP page. ⢠Clear the cache . See The cache memory on page 14 4 . ⢠Security info to view security information about t he current WAP connection and the server. ⢠Quit . See Ending a WAP connection on page 14 1 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 141 Direct calling The WAP browser supports functions that you can access while browsing. You can make a voice call, send DTMF tones while a voice call is in progress, and save a name and a phone number from a WAP page in cont acts. Ending a WAP connecti on To quit browsing and to end the connection, press Options and select Quit . When Quit browsing? is shown, press Ye s . Alternatively, press . If GSM data is the select ed data bearer, press twice. The phone ends the connection to the WAP service. Appearance se ttings of th e WAP browser 1. While browsing, press Options and select Appear . sett ings , or in standby mode, press Menu and select Services , Settings and Appearance settings . 2. Select Text wrapping or Show images . 3. Select On or Off for Text wrapping and Ye s or No for Show images . When Text wrapping is set to On , the text contin ues on the nex t line if it cannot be shown on one line. If you select Off , th e text is abbrev iated, if it is too long to be shown on one line. When Show images is set to No , any pictures appearing on the WAP page are not shown. This can speed up t he browsing of WAP pages that contain a lot of pictures.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 142 Bookmarks You can save WAP addresses as bookmarks in the phone â s memory. 1. While browsing, press Options and select Bookmarks , or in standby mode, press Menu and select Services an d Bookmarks . 2. Scroll to the bookmark you want to use and press Opti ons . 3. Select one of the following options: Go to to make a connection to the WAP page associated with the bookmark. View , Ed it or De lete to view, modify or delete the selected bookmark. Send to send the selected bookmark directly to another phone, select As bookmark , or to send the bookmark as a text me ssage, select As text message . New bookmark to create a new bookmark without connecting to the WAP service. Key in the address and the title of the WAP page and press OK . Note that your phone may have some pre-installed bookmarks for sites that are not affiliated to Nokia. Nokia does not guarantee or endorse these sit es. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions for security and content as you would with any Internet site. Receiving a bookmark When you have received a bookmark, 1 bookmark received is displayed. Press View , then press Opti ons and select View to view the bookmark, Sav e to save the bookmark, or Discard to discard it.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 143 Service inbox The phone is abl e to receive service me ssages (pushed messages) sent by you r service provider. Service messages are notifications of, for example news headlines, and they may contain a text message or an address of a WAP service. To access the Service inbox in standby mode, when you have received a service message, press View . ⢠If you press Exit the message is move d to the Service inbox . To access the Service inbox later, press Menu and select Services and Service inbox . To access the Service inbox while browsing, press Options and select Service inbox . Scroll to the message you want, press Options and sele ct ⢠Retrieve to activate the WML browser and download the marked content. ⢠Details to display detailed information on the service notification. ⢠Delete to delet e the selected service noti fication. Setting the phone to receive service messages Press Menu and select Services , Settings , Service inbox settings , and Service messages . To set the phone to receive service messages,select On . If you select Off , the phone will not receive service messages.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 144 The cache memory Note: The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache of your phone . A cache is a buffe r memory, which is used to stor e data temp oraril y. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, your ba nk account), empty the cache of your phone after each u se. To empty the cache, ⢠while browsing, press Options and select Clear the cache , o r ⢠in standby mode, press Menu and select Services and Clear th e cache . Browser secu rity settings Security features are required for some WAP services, such as banking services or shopping on a WAP site. For such connections you need security certificates and possibly a security module, which may be available on your SIM card. For more information, contact your service provider. Security modu le The security module can contain certificates as well as private and public keys. The security module provides security services for WAP-related applications, and allows you to use a digital signatu re. The certificates are saved in the security module by the service provider, or they can be downloaded from a WAP site. Press Menu and select Services , Settings and Security module settings . Select ⢠Security module details to show the security module tit le, its status, manufacturer and serial number.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 145 ⢠Module PIN request to set the phone to ask for t he module PIN when using services provided by the security module. Key in the code and select On . To disable the module PIN request, select Off . ⢠Change module PIN to change the module PIN, if allowed by the security module. Key in the current module PIN code, then key in the new code twice. ⢠Change signing PIN to view a list of signing PINs. Select the signing PIN that you want to change. Key in the current PIN code, then key in the new code twice. See also Access codes on page 14 . Certificat es There are three kinds of certificates: server certificate s, authority certificates and user certificates. ⢠Server certificates The phone uses a server certificate to cre ate a secure connection to the WAP service provider. The phone receives the server certificate from the service provider before the connection is established and its validity is checked using the authority certificates saved in the phone. Serve r certificates are not saved. The phone indicates whethere the identity of the WAP server or WAP gateway can be verified, whether the WAP server or WAP gateway certificate is authentic, and whether you have the corre ct authority certificate on your phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 146 The security indicator is displayed during a WAP connection, if the data transmission between the phone and the WAP gateway or WAP server (identified by the IP addre ss in the Edit active service set tings ) is encrypted. However, the security i ndicator is not an indicati on that the data transmission between the gateway and the content server (place where the requested resource is saved) is secure. It is up to the service provider to secure the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. ⢠Authority certificates For using some WAP services, such as banking services, and for checking the validity of other certificates, you need an autho rity certificate. You can download the certificate from a WAP site, if the WAP service supports the use of authority certificates. If you save the certificate, it is added to the certificate list in the phone. Authority certificates may also be available in the security module. ⢠User certificates User certificates are issu ed to users by a Certifying A uthority. User certificates are required, for example, to create a digital signature and they associate the user with a specific private key in a security module. User certificates are saved in the security module by the service provider, or you can download them to your phone from a WAP site, if supported by the security module of the SIM card.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 147 Digital si gnature You can create digital signatures with your phone. The signature can be traced back to you via the private keyin the security module and the user certificate that was used to create the signature. Using the digital signature may be considered to be equal to a normal signature on any legal document. To create a digital signature, select a link on a WAP page, for example the title of the book you want to buy and its price. The text t hat needs to be signed (possibly including amount, date, etc.) will be shown. Check that the h eader text is Re ad and that the digital signature icon is shown. Note: If the digital signature icon does not appear, there is a security breach, and you should not enter any personal data such as your signing PIN. To add the digital signature text, read all of the text first and then select Sign . Note: The text may not fit within a single screen. Therefore, make sure to scroll through and read all of the text before signing. Select the user certi ficate you want to use. Ke y in the signing PIN (see Access codes on page 14 ) and press OK . The digital signature icon will disappear and the WAP service may display a confirmation of your purchase. Cookies You can set the phone to allow or prevent the receiving of cookies.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 148 A cookie is data that a WAP site saves in your phone â s browser cache memory. The data can be, for example, your user information or your browsing preferences. Cookies will be saved until you clear the cache memory, see The cache memory on page 144 . 1. While browsing, press Options and select Cookies, or in standby mode, press Menu an d select Services , Settings and Security settings . 2. Select Cookie s and select Allo w or Reject to allow or prevent the phone receiving cookies. â SIM services (Menu 14) In addition to the functions that are available on the phone, your SIM card may provide additional services that you can access in Menu 14. Menu 14 is only shown if it is supported by your SIM card. The name and contents of the menu depend entirely on the service available. Note: For availability, rates and infor mation on using SIM service s, contact your SIM card vend or, e.g. network o perator, service prov ider or other vend or. You can set the phone to show you the confirmation messages that are sent between your phone and the network when you are using the SIM services by selecting the option Yes in Phone settings , Confirm SIM service actions . Note that accessing these services may involve sending a text message (SMS) or making a phone call for which you may be charged.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 149 8. PC Connectivity You can access the Internet when your phone is connected to a compatible PC via an IR connection or a data cable. You can use your phone with a variety of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With PC Suite you can, for example send text and picture messages, synchronise contacts, cale ndar, to-do notes and notes between your phone and the PC, and manage your WAP bookmarks and connection settings. You can find more information and downloadable files on the Nokia website, www.nokia. com/support/phones/6800. â PC Suite The PC Suite contain s the following applicati ons : ⢠Nokia Application Installer to install Java applications from the PC to the phone. ⢠Nokia Image Converter to modify images as pictures for multimedia messages, wallpapers or operator logos and to transfer them to your phone. ⢠Nokia Sound Converter to modify polyphonic ringing tones to make them compatible with your phone and transfer them t o your phone. ⢠Nokia Content Copier to copy data or back-up data from your phone to your PC or to another Nokia phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 150 ⢠Nokia PC WAP M anager to edit and send your WAP bookmarks or update the connection sets on your phone. ⢠Nokia Phone Editor to send text messages (SMS) and edit contacts, and message settings of your phone. ⢠Nokia Phone Browser to browse and modify picture and audio files in the phone â s memory and to transfer them betwee n phone and PC. ⢠Nokia PC Sync to synchronise contacts, calendar and to-do notes between your phone and your PC. ⢠Nokia 6800 data modem drivers enable you to use your phone as a modem. ⢠Nokia Modem Options contains settings for HSCSD a nd GPRS connections. ⢠Nokia Connection Manager to select the connection type between the PC and the phone. GPRS, HSCSD and CSD You can use GPRS (General Packet Radio Service), HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data) and CSD (Circuit Switched Data, GSM data) da ta services. For availability and subscription to high-speed data services, contact your network operator or service provider. Note that the use of HSCSD service consumes th e phone â s battery faster than normal voice or data calls. You may need to connect the phone to a charger for the duration of data transfer. See GPRS modem sett ings on page 132 .
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 151 â Using data communications ap plications For information on using a data communications application, refer to the documentation provided with it. 1. If you use an IR connect ion: ⢠Activate the IR connect ion in the phone, see Infrared on page 130 . Make sure that the conn ection is active on your PC. If you use the cable DKU-5: ⢠Connect the cable to t he USB port on your computer and to the connector on your phone. 2. Start using the data communications application on the compute r. Note that making or answering phone calls during a computer connection is not recommended as it might disrupt the operation. For a better performance during data calls, place the phone on a stationary surface with the keypad facing downward. Do not move the phone or hold it in your hand during a da ta call.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 152 9. Battery information â Charging and Discharg ing Your phone is po wered by a rech argeable batt ery. Note that a new battery â s full performance is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cy cles! The battery can be cha rged and discharge d hundreds of times bu t it will eventually wear out. When the operating time (talk-time and standby time) is noticeably shorter th an normal, it is time to buy a new battery. Use only batteries ap proved by the ph one manufacturer an d recharge your ba ttery only with the chargers approved by the manufactu rer. Unplug the charger when not i n use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger for longer than a week, since overcharging may shorten its lifetim e. If left unused a f ully charged bat tery will discharge itself o ver time. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery t o charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery w hich is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, cl ip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - t erminals of th e battery (metal strips on the battery) for example wh en you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-ci rcuiting the te rminals may dama ge the battery or the connectin g object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15 ð C and 25 ð C (59 ð F and 77 ð F). A phon e with a ho t or cold bat tery may
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 153 temporarily not work, even when the battery is fully charged. Batteries â performanc e is particularly lim ited in tempera tures well below f reezing. Do not di spose of b atteries in a fire ! Dispose of batteries ac cording to local regulations (e.g . recycling). Do n ot dispose as household waste.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 154 CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your phone is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfil any warranty obligat ions and to enjoy this product for m any years. ⢠Keep the ph one and all its pa rts and accessories out of the reach of small children . ⢠Keep the phone dry. Precipitat ion, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can conta in minera ls that w ill corr ode elec tronic circuits . ⢠Do not use or store the phone in dusty, dirty areas. Its m oving parts can be da maged. ⢠Do not store the pho ne in hot areas. High tem peratures can shorten the life of electroni c devices, damage batt eries, and warp or melt certain plastic s. ⢠Do not store the phone in cold areas. When it wa rms up (to its normal temp erature), moisture can form insi de, which may d amage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open th e phone. Non-expert handling may damage it. ⢠Do not drop, knock or shake t he phone. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cl eaning solvents, or strong dete rgents to clean the phone. ⢠Do not paint the phone. Paint ca n clog the m oving parts and p revent proper opera tion. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approv ed replacement antenna. Unaut horised antennas, modifications or attachments cou ld damage the ph one and may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggestion s apply equally to your ph one, battery, charger or any accessory. If any of them is not working properly, take it to your nearest qualif ied service fa cility. The personnel there w ill assist yo u and, if necessary, ar range for se rvice.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 155 IMPORT ANT SAFETY INFORMA TION â Traffic Safety Do not use a h and-held telephone while driving a vehicle. Always secure the ph one in its holder; do not plac e the phone on the passeng er seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Remembe r road safety always comes f i rst ! â Operating environment Remember to f ollow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your phone whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cau se interference or dange r. Use the phone o nly in its norma l operating positions. Parts of the p hone are magnet ic. Metallic material s may be attr acted to the ph one, and persons with a hearing aid sho uld not hold the phon e to the ear with the hearing aid. Always secure the phone i n its holder, because metallic materi als may be attracted by the earpiece. Do not plac e credit cards or ot her magnetic storage media near the phone, because information stored on them may be erased. â Electronic devices Most modern electroni c equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipm ent may not b e shielded against the RF sig nals from your wireless phone.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 156 Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recomme nd that a minimum separation of 20 cm (6 inch es) be maintained b etween a hand held wireless phone an d a pacemaker to avoid potent ial interference with the pacemaker. These recommen dations are consistent with the indep endent re search by and rec ommendat ions of Wireles s Techn ology Res earch. Persons with pacemakers: ⢠Should always keep the phone more than 20 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when the phone is sw itched on; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a brea st pocket; ⢠Should use th e ear opposite the pacemak er to minimise the potential for interference. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your phone immediately. Hearing aids Some digital wireless phone s may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you m ay want to consul t your service provider . Other medical devices Operation of any radio tran smitting equi pment, including cellular phones, may interfere with the functional ity of inadequately p rotected medical devices. Consu lt a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequ ately shielded from external RF energy or if you have an y questions. Switch off your phone in health ca re facilities when any regulatio ns posted in these ar eas instruct you to do so. Hosp itals or health care facilities ma y be using equip ment that cou ld be sensitive to external RF energy.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 157 Vehicle s RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shie lded electronic systems in motor vehicles (e.g . electronic fuel injection systems, electron ic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air-bag systems). Check with the manuf acturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer o f any equipment that has be en added to your vehicle. Posted facilities Switch your phone off in any facility where posted notices so r equire. â Potentiall y explosive at mospheres Switch off your phone when in any area with a pot entially explosive atmosphere an d obey all signs and instructions. Spa rks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch off the ph one when at a refuelling point (service station). U sers are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio eq uipment in fuel dep ots (fuel storage an d distribution a reas), chemical plant s or where blastin g operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atm osphere are often but not always clearly marke d. They include below d eck on boats; ch emical transfer or storage facilities; ve hicles using liquified petroleum gas (such a s propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as gra in, dust or metal p owders; and any ot her area where you would normally be ad vised to turn off your vehicle engine.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 158 â Vehicles Only qualified personnel should se rvice the phon e, or install the phone in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dan gerous and may in validate any warr anty which may a pply to the uni t. Check regularly that all wireless phone equ ipment in your vehicle is mounted and operat ing properly. Do not store or carr y flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment a s the phone, it s parts or acce ssories. For vehicles equipp ed with an air bag, remem ber that an air bag inflat es with great force. Do not place obje cts, including both installed o r portable wire less equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployme nt area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is impro perly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury c ould result. Using your p hone while in th e air is prohibit ed. Switch off yo ur phone befor e boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teleph ones in an air craft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless tel ephone network and may be illegal. Failure to ob serve these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of teleph one services to the offe nder, or legal a ction or bot h. â Emergency calls Importan t: This phone, like any w ireless phone, oper ates using radio signals, wireless and landli ne networks as well as user-programmed fu nctions. Because of this, connection s in all conditions can not be guaranteed. Therefo re, you should never rely solely upon any wireless phone for essential commun ications (e.g. medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all w ireless phone networks or when certain network services and/or phone fea tures are in use. Check with local service providers.
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 159 To make an emergency call: 1. If th e phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal stren gth. Some networks may require th at a valid SIM card is properl y inserted in t he phone. 2. Press as many times a s needed (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu , etc.) to clear the display and ready t he phone for calls. 3. Key in the emergency numb er for your present l ocation (e.g. 112 or o ther official emergency number). Eme rgency numbers vary by loca tion. 4. Press the key If certain features a re in use, you may first need to turn those feat ures off before you can make an emergency call. Consult th is guide and you r local cellular service p rovider. When making an emergenc y call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Rem ember that your wireless pho ne may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given permission to do so. â Certification information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEE TS THE EU REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES . Your mobile phone is a radio transm itter and receiver. It is designed and manufac tured not to exceed the lim its for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy recommended by The Council of th e European Unio n. These limits are p art of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitt ed levels of RF energ y for the gener al population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organisations through perio dic and thorough evaluation of scien tific studies. The lim its include a su bstantial safety marg in designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones emp loys a unit of measurement known as the Speci fic Abs orptio n Rate, or SAR. The SAR li mit re commen ded by Th e Counci l of the
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 160 European Union is 2.0 W/kg.* Tests for SAR have been conducted using standard op erating positions with th e phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. A lthough the SA R is determined a t the highest certifie d power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while oper ating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the pho ne is designed to oper ate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station antenna, th e lower the p ower outp ut. Before a phone model is availabl e for sale to th e public, compliance with the Euro pean R&TTE directive m ust be shown. This di rective includes as one essential requireme nt the protection o f the health a nd the safety for the user a nd any other per son. The highest SAR value for this mod el phone when te sted for complianc e against the standar d was 0.62 W/kg. While there may b e differences b etween the SAR levels of various phones and at var ious positions, they all meet the EU requirements for RF exposure. * The SAR limit for mob ile phones used by th e public is 2.0 w atts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of tissue. The limit incorp orates a substantial margin of safety to give additional pro tection for the public an d to account for any variat ions in measurements . SAR values may vary depending on nationa l reporting requir ements and the net work band. For SAR informatio n in other regions please look under product information at www .nokia.com.
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 161 INDEX A accented characters 45 access codes. See also PIN code, PIN2 code, PUK code, PUK2 code, security code accessories settings 103 alarm clock 106 B background picture. See wallpaper backspace key 22, 45 battery charging 31 installing/rem oving 28 bookmarks saving for WAP services 142 brightness adjustin g display 102 browser security security module for WAP applications 144 business card receiving 55 sending 55 C calculator 121 converting currency 122 calendar 107 making a note 108 synchronising 126 call barring 104 password 15 call lists. See call regi ster call register dialled numbers 90 erasing call lists 91 missed calls 90 received calls 90 call settings activating call divert/ forwarding 95 answering a call with any key 96 call waiting 97
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 162 own number display 97 redialli ng, au tomatic 96 selecting a phone line 97 setting call symmary after a call 97 speed dialling 96 caller groups adding a contact 57 naming a group 57 removing a contact 57 selecting a ringi ng tone 57 setting the group logo 57 calling. Se e calls calls activating call waiting 97 answering 41 cost settings 91 dialled numbers 91 diverting 95 erasing call li sts 91 forwarding 95 functions during a call 42 making a call 38 making a conference call 40 missed calls 90 received calls 90 redialling th e last number 38 rejecting 41 setting automatic redial 9 6 to the voice mailbox 39 using speed dialling 39, 96 viewing costs 91 viewing duration 91 character key (Chr) 23, 45 charging battery 31 chat messages 84 clock 94 conference call 40 connection activati ng the phone to register automatically to GPRS network 132 connecting to a WAP site 138 connecting to PC via IR/ cable 151 sending/receiving data via GPRS 132
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 163 sending/receiv ing data vi a IR 131 contacts adding/saving names and phone numbers 51 arranging contacts to caller groups 57 checking the memory in use/status 5 0, 51 copying names and numbers from SIM/phone memory 54 editing names/numbers 53 erasing names/numbers 54 receiving names/numbers as a business card 55 saving mult iple numbers/ text items per name 51 searching a name 53 sending names/numbers as a business card 55 speed dialling 39 synchronising 126 viewing own numbers 57 costs call costs 91 countdown timer 128 counters checking data size in bytes 92 currency converting 122 D date 95 digital signature 147 display settings adjusting brightne ss 102 changing indicator/ header colours 101 operator logo 101 screen saver 102 wallpaper 100 distribution list (for text messages) 73 E e-mail. See messages enter key 22 F factory settings resetting menu settings to original values 105
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 164 flip activating the l oudspeaker 42 opening 33 opening to un lock the keypad lock 36 folders adding new 72 archiving messages 72, 81 deleted items 81 deleting 78 deleting all messages from a folder 78 drafts 81 for e-mails 81 for multimedia messages 77 in the Gallery menu 114 inbox e-mails 81 multimedia messages 77 text messages 71 outbox e-mails 81 multimedia messages 77 text messages 71 saved items for sending multimedia messages later 77 sent items 81 font size selecting 90 G gallery (the Gallery menu) 114 folders 114 presaved pictures 100 General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) activati ng the automat ic register to GPRS network 132 as data bearer in WAP 137 checking data size in bytes 92 modem settings for PC 132 H headset. See accessories I idle mode. See standby mode infrared (IR). See also connection
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 165 sending and receiving data via IR 131 installing battery 28 SIM card 28 J Java (the Applica tions menu) 120 checking the memory 121 downloading a pplications 120 starting an applica tion 119 K keyboard keys 22 light key 22 switching on or off 36 writing text 44 keyguard. See keypad lock keypad lock locking/unlocking 36 using the security code 98 keys in browsing the WAP pages 139 joystick 21 left and right sele ction key 20 of the messaging keyboard 22 power key 20, 23, 31 profile key 22 speed dialling 39 volume keys 20 when flip closed 20, 21 when flip open 22, 23, 31 backspace key 22 character key 23 enter key 22 keyboard lights 22 shift keys 23 space bars 23 L language selecting from phone settings 98 last number redial 38 loopset. See accessories loudspeaker activating/deactivating 42
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 166 adjustin g volume 20 connecting a carkit/ headset 42 M memory checking GPRS data size 92 checking status 50, 51 checking the memory available for Java applications 121 copying names and numbers to SIM /phone 54 of the phone 50, 51 of the SIM card 50, 51 shared 19 menu accessing by scrolling 58 shortcut 58 list of functions 60 using the menu 58 messages concatenated 68 deleting all fol ders 78 deleting all from a folde r 78 deleting text messages 70 e-mail downloading from your account 80 reading 80 replying 81 writing/sendi ng info messages 86 multimedia deleting/forwarding 76 editing 76 reading/replying 76 selecting an ima ge from the Gallery folder 74 writing/sendi ng 74 organising into folders 72 picture messages 68 reading text messages 70 replying to text messages 70 selecting the font size 90 sending text messages using distribution lists 73 starting/sending chat messages 84 writing with predictive
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 167 text input 4 6 writing with the keyboard 44 writing with traditional text input 4 7 writing/sendin g text messages 69 module PIN 15 multimedia messages. See messages N network selecting manuall y/ automatically 99 network services automatic update of date and time 95 barring a call 104 call costs 91 call summary 97 call waiting 9 7 concatenated messages 68 diverting/forwarding a call 95 info messages 86 line for outgoing calls 97 missed calls own number display 97 received calls restricting calls to a limited user group 105 voice mailbox 85 notepad writing a calen dar note 108 O operator logo 101 outgoing messages outbox 77, 81 P PC suite applications 149 connecting to PC via IR/ cable 151 phone settings selecting a lang uage 98 selecting network manually/ automatically 99 setting welcome note 99 picture messages 68 PIN code 14, 104 power key 20, 23, 31
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 168 predictive text input setting on or off 46 writing compound words 47 profile key 22 profiles activating 93 personalising 93 PUK and PUK2 codes 14 R radio listening through a loudspeaker 114 saving/deleti ng a channel 113 setting the frequency 113 tuning a cha nnel 112 tuning, automatic 1 13 tuning, manu al 113 received messages inbox 71, 77, 81 S safety instructions 11 screen saver 102 security code 14 changing 105 locking the keys 98 security keyguard. See keypad lock security settings 15 call barring password 15 digital signature 147 module PIN 15 PIN code 14, 104 PUK code 14 PUK2 code 14 restricting calls to a limited user group 105 restricting incoming/ outgoing calls 104 security code 14 signing PIN (for security module in SIM) 15 wallet code 15, 123 selection key 20 services, additional SIM 148 shared memory 19 shift keys 23, 44 signing PIN (for security module in SIM) 15
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 169 SIM card copying memory 54 installing 28 SMS messages. See messages space bars 23 speed dialling assigning a phone number 56 calling 39 setting 96 standby mode 23 changing indicator colours 101 display indicators in 23, 24 operator logo 101 screen saver 102 wallpaper 24 stopwatch lap timing 130 split timing 129 timing 129 switching on or off 22 keyboard lights 36 power 20 switching off with profile key 31 when flip closed 20 synchronise data in contacts/ calendar 126 starting from PC 128 starting from phone 126 T text messages. See messages time settings clock 94 date 95 setting the alarm 106 updating date and time automatically 95 to-do list making a note 109 organising notes by priority/date 109 tones adjusting volu me 102 ringing tone types 102 selecting a tone for a caller group 57
Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 170 setting all by selecting a profile 93 setting an alert for a certain caller group 102 V voice mailbox 39 listening t o messages 85 mailbox number 85 messages 85 volume using volume keys 20 W wallet creating wallet code 123 paying purchases 125 signing documents via WAP 147 wallet code 15, 1 23 wallpaper 24, 1 00 activating/dea ctivating 101 selecting a picture 100 WAP servi ces connecting to a WAP sit e 138 downloading wallpaper pictures 100 saving bookmarks 142 security module in SIM 144 service settings GPRS data bearer 137 GSM data bearer 136 receiving as SMS message 134 signing documents 147 using the keys in browsing 139 welcome note 99 writing accented characters 45 changing character case 44 deleting/correctingtext 22, 45 e-mail messages multimedia message s 74 special characters 23, 45 symbols 44 text messages 69 tips fo r wri ting 48 upper and lower case
Index Copyr ight îÂÂîÂÂî 2003 Nokia. All rights re served. 171 letters 23, 44 using the keyboad 44 with p redic tive t ext i nput 46 with tradition al text input 47
This limited warranty shall apply in part of Nokia Mobile Phonesâ Europe & Africa Region unless a local warranty exists. Nokia Corporation, Nokia Mobile Phones (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) warrants that this NOKIA product (âÂÂProductâÂÂ) is at the time of its original purchase free of defects in materials, design and workmanship subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. This limited warranty is given to the end-purchaser of the Product (âÂÂCustomerâÂÂ). It shall neither exclude nor limit i) any mandatory statutory rights of the Customer or ii) any of the CustomerâÂÂs rights against the seller/dealer of the Product. 2. The warranty period is twelve (12) months from the date on which the first Customer purchased the Product. In case of a subsequent purchase or other change of owner/user, such warranty period shall continue for the remaining part of the twelve (12) month period and otherwise remain unaffected. This limited warranty is only valid and enforceable in the following countries: Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, the Czech Republic, Estonia, any member state of the European Union, Hungary, Iceland, Israel, Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, Malta, Norway, Poland, Romania, the Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Switzerland and Turkey. 3. During the warranty period Nokia or its authorized service company will repair or replace, at NokiaâÂÂs sole discretion, a defective Product. Nokia will return the repaired Product or another Product to the Customer in good working condition. All parts or other equipment for which replacements have been provided shall become the property of Nokia. 4. A repaired or replaced Product will not be given a prolonged or renewed warranty period. 5. This limited warranty will not cover painted covers or other similar personalized parts. In all cases that require unlocking or locking of an operator SIM- lock, Nokia will first direct the Customer to such operator for unlocking or locking of the operator SIM-lock before repairing or replacing the Product. 6. This limited warranty shall not apply to deterioration due to normal wear and tear. This limited warranty shall further not apply if: (i) the defect was caused by the fact that the Product has been subjected to: use in contradiction with the ownerâÂÂs/user manual, rough handling, exposure to moisture, dampness or extreme thermal or environmental conditions or rapid changes in such conditions, corrosion, oxidation, unauthorized modifications or connections, unauthorized opening or repair, repair by use of unauthorized spare parts, misuse, improper installation, accident, forces of nature, spillage of food or liquid, influence from chemical products or other acts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia (including but not limited to deficiencies in consumable parts, such as batteries which all by their nature have a limited lifetime, and breakage or damage to antennas) unless the defect was caused directly by defects in materials, design or workmanship; (ii) Nokia or its authorized service company was not notified by the Customer of the defect within thirty (30) days after the appearance of the defect within the warranty period; (iii) the Product was not returned to Nokia or its authorized service company within thirty (30) days after the appearance of the defect within the warranty period; (iv) the Product serial number, the accessory date code or the IMEI number has been removed, erased, defaced, altered or is illegible; (v) the defect was caused by a defective function of the cellular network; (vi) the defect was caused by the fact that the Product was used with or connected to an accessory not manufactured and supplied by Nokia or used in other than its intended use; (vii) the defect was caused by the fact that the battery was short-circuited or seals of the battery enclosure or cells were broken or show evidence of tampering or the battery was used in equipment other than for which it has been specified; or (viii) the Product software needs to be upgraded due to changes in cellular network parameters. 7. To claim this limited warranty the Customer shall present either i) a legible and non-modified original warranty card which clearly indicates the name and address of the seller, the date and place of purchase, the product type and the IMEI or other serial number or alternatively ii) a legible and non-modified original purchase receipt which contains the same information, if such purchase receipt is presented to the seller/dealer of the Product. 8. This limited warranty is the CustomerâÂÂs sole and exclusive remedy against Nokia and NokiaâÂÂs sole and exclusive liability against the Customer for defects or malfunctions of the Product. This limited warranty replaces all other warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written, (non-mandatory) statutory, contractual, in tort or otherwise. Nokia is in no event liable for any incidental, consequential or indirect damage, costs or expenses. Neither is Nokia in any event liable for any direct damage, costs or expenses, if the Customer is a legal person. 9. Any change or amendment to this limited warranty requires NokiaâÂÂs prior written consent. LIMITED MANUFACTURERâÂÂS WARRANTY PART OF EUROPE & AFRICA REGION 9359974/02 3310_en.qxd 12.12.2001 12:35 Page 1
FILL IN WITH BLOCK LETTERS PurchaserâÂÂs Name: _____________________________________________________ Address: _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ Country: _____________________________________________________________ Phone: ______________________________________________________________ Date of Purchase (dd/mm/yy): Product Type (on phone type label under battery): Product Model (on phone type label under battery): Phone Serial No (on phone type label under battery): Place of Purchase: _____________________________________________________ Store Name: __________________________________________________________ Store Address: ________________________________________________________ W ARRANTY CARD Stamp // // / â 3310_en.qxd 12.12.2001 12:35 Page 2